PCS-915ID

PCS-915ID
Distributed Busbar Relay

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay i

Date: 2016-03-22
Preface
DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
WARNING!
Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.
WARNING!
Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
 Earthing
Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.
 Operating environment
ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.
ii PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2016-03-22
Preface
 Ratings
Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.
 Printed circuit board
Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.
 External circuit
Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.
NOTICE!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.
Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com
P/N: ZL_PCS-915ID_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R1.03
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay iii

Date: 2016-03-22
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Measurement and Recording

Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce how to make function configuration, binary input configuration, binary output
configuration and LED indicator configuration etc. through PCS-Explorer software.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
iv PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2016-03-22
Preface
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
≥1
OR gate
Comparator
BI Binary signal via opto-coupler
SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting
EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay v

Date: 2016-03-22
Preface
SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
OTH Input of other signal
XXX Output signal
Timer
t
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
t
10ms 2ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (2ms), non-settable]
[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay drop off, settable)
[XXX] [XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay drop off, settable)
IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
Symbol Corresponding Relationship
Basic Example
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3
ABC L123 Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31
U (voltage) V U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2
vi PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2016-03-22
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-5
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Typical connection of distributed busbar protection used in double busbars
arrangement ................................................................................................................................. 1-1
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay 1-a

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
Distributed busbar protection PCS-915ID is a set of numerical busbar differential protection
intended to be used for protecting and monitoring various busbar arrangement of various voltage
levels. Distributed busbar protection is composed of one central unit and number of bay units, the
central unit is linked to bay units via fibre optic cables in point-to-point communication mode.
Central unit transmits messages per cycle to all bay units via optical fibre. The message
incorporates synchronizing signal and tripping command if required. The central unit also performs
all protection calculation after acquisition of analog and digital samples from bay units.
Bay units process sampling on analog and digital inputs and implement tripping command for
corresponding bays subject to the DSP module selected for bay units. Communication breakdown
of any one bay unit with central unit will block busbar differential protection to prevent
mal-operation. The integrated protections (such as feeder breaker failure protection, overcurrent
protection, pole disagreement protection and BC/BS switch-onto-fault protection) of concerned
bays with the communication breakdown bay unit will be disabled automatically whereas the
protections on other healthy bay units remains available.
A set of distributed busbar protection can connect up to 32 groups of CT (each bay unit can
connect to one bay, but per BC/BS bay with double CTs will takes up two groups of CT). If voltage
is sampled for the project, one additional bay unit is available to connect to VT(s).
The following figure shows a typical connection of distributed busbar protection used in double
busbars arrangement.
Bay01 Bay02 Bay31
Bay Unit Bay Unit Bay Unit
Optical Communication
Central Unit
Busbar No.1
Bay Unit
Bay32
Busbar No.2
Figure 1.1-1 Typical connection of distributed busbar protection used in double busbars arrangement
PCS-915ID utilizes NR’s innovative hardware platform which supports both conventional CT/VT
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay 1-1

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction
and electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication
protocols, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850 and DNP3.0.
The maximized functions are introduced in this manual, for a specific project, some functions
maybe not configured or disabled according to user’s requirement.
NOTICE!
The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.
In this instruction manual, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus
coupler bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.
For example, the tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 can be
described as “@Bay02.50/51G.Op_Trp”, if the label setting of bay 02 i.e. [Name_Bay02]
is set as “Fdr01”, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay
02 is [Fdr01.50/51G.Op_Trp]. If [Name_Bay02] is set as “BC1”, the displayed tripping
signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]. Please refer
to Section “Label Settings” in Chapter 7 for details.
1.2 Function
PCS-915ID provides the following functions
1. Protection function
 Busbar differential protection (87B)
 Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection
 DPFC percentage restraint differential protection
 Bus coupler protection
 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)
 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
 Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)
 Overcurrent protection (50/51)
 Feeder protection
 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
1-2 PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction
 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)
 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
 Overcurrent protection (50/51)
NOTICE!
DPFC is the abbreviation of “deviation of power frequency component”. When a fault

occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.
2. Auxiliary function
 Dynamic busbar replica
 CT circuit supervision
 VT circuit supervision
 Disconnector position alarm
1.3 Feature
1. Protection and Control
 Parallel calculation of double DSP system
 Independent fault detector element
 Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip
 Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection
 High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection
 Matching to different CT ratios
 A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm
 Comprehensive event recorder
 Language switchover—English+ selected language
2. Four kinds of clock synchronization methods
 Conventional
 PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
 IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
 PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the optical coupler

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction
 PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the optical coupler
 SAS
 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
 Advanced
 IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588
 IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
 PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
 No clock syncronization
3. Event recorder and disturbance recorder
 1024 latest fault reports
 1024 latest self-supervision reports
 1024 latest status change of binary input reports
 32 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the
international COMTRADE file)
4. Communication
 Optional 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization
 Optional 2 or 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform
to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
 Optional 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0
protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
5. User Interface
 Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.
 1 RS-232 rear port for printer
 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting
 Language switchover—English+ selected language
 Auxiliary software—PCS-Explorer

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction
1.4 Abbreviation
Symbol Description
FD Fault detector
BBx Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar
BCy Bus coupler No.y, y is the number of each bus coupler
BSz Bus section No.z, z is the number of each bus section
feeder m Feeder No.m, m is the number of each feeder
bay n Bay No.n (includes each BC/BS and each feeder), n is the number of each bay
BUj Bay unit No.j, j is the number of each bay unit
VCE Voltage controlled element
BBP Busbar differential protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BFI Breaker failure initiation
DZP Dead zone fault protection
PD Pole disagreement protection
SAS Substation automatic system
RTU Remote terminal unit
DPFC Deviation of power frequency component
CT Current transformer
VT Voltage transformer

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Introduction

Date: 2015-06-29
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data ................................................................................... 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications.............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.1 Environmental Tests............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.3 Insulation Tests .................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.2 Dead Zone Fault Protection ................................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.3 Switch-onto-fault Protection................................................................................................. 2-7

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
2.7.4 Overcurrent Protection......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.5 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.6 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 2-8
2.7.7 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection ...................................................................................... 2-8

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications
NOTICE!
“System phase sequence”, which can be set by PCS-Explorer, this setting informs the
device of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on
the device, labeled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B and C for
correct operation.
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current

Phase rotation ABC or ACB
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Accuracy ±0.5%In
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage

Phase rotation ABC or ACB
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 200V
-10s 260V
-1s 300V
Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un
Accuracy ±0.5%Un
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc/220Vdc/250Vdc or 110/220Vac
Permissible voltage range 88~300Vdc or 88V-265Vac
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <25W
Operating condition <35W

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated voltage 24Vdc 30Vdc 48Vdc
Rated current 1.2mA 1.5mA 2.4mA
On value 16.8-28.8Vdc 21-36Vdc 33.6-57.6Vdc
Off value <12Vdc <15Vdc <24Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
Rated voltage 110Vdc 125Vdc 220Vdc 250Vdc

Rated current drain 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA
On value 77-132Vdc 87.5-150Vdc 154-264Vdc 175-300Vdc
Off value <55Vdc <62.5Vdc <110Vdc <125Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
2.1.5 Binary Output

1. Tripping/signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A
Pickup time (Typical) <5ms
Dropoff time <5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
12A@3s
18A@1s
Short duration current
24A@0.5s
40A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations
2. Signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A
Pickup time <10ms
Dropoff time <10ms
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 1.00A@48Vdc

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
0.50A@110Vdc
0.40A@125Vdc
0.25A@220Vdc
0.20A@250Vdc
12A@3s
15A@1s
Short duration current
20A@0.5s
30A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations
2.2 Mechanical Specifications
Mounting Way Flush mounted

Housing color Silver grey
Approx. 10kg (The central unit)
Weight per device
Approx. 8kg (Bay unit)
Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Front side IP51
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree Ⅱ
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port

Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
Transmission distance <500m

Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45 ST (Multi mode)
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX 100Base-FX
Transmission distance <100m <2km (1310nm)
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Connector type LC
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 850nm
Margin Min +3.0dB

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type EPSON® 300K printer
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Transmission distance <500m
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
2.5 Type Tests
2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Insulation Tests

Standard IEC 60255-27-2013
Test voltage 2.8kV, dc, 1min
Dielectric tests
Test voltage 2kV, ac, 1min
Impulse voltage 5kV (the rated insulation voltage > 63V)
Impulse voltage tests
Impulse voltage 1kV (the rated insulation voltage < 63V)
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VdC
measurements
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-26-2013
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC 60255-26-2013 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
Radio frequency interference tests IEC 60255-26-2013 class III

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-26-2013
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 5kHz/15ms, 100kHz/0.75ms
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz/15ms, 100kHz/0.75ms
IEC 60255-26-2013
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us surge
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-26-2013
Conducted RF Electromagnetic Power supply, AC, I/O, Communication terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance kHz~80MHz
Spot frequency: 27MHz/68MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity Class V, continuous 100A/m, 1000A/m for 1~3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
Class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity Class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
Auxiliary power supply performance IEC 60255-26-2013

- Voltage dips Up to 200ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
 ISO9001:2008
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001:2007
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L5
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
2.7 Protective Functions
The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here.
In -- rated secondary current of CT
Un -- rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection
Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater
Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un
Residual voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Negative-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
2.7.2 Dead Zone Fault Protection
Time setting range for BC/BS dead zone fault protection 0.00~10.00s
Time setting range for feeder dead zone fault protection 0.00~4.90s
Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms
2.7.3 Switch-onto-fault Protection
2.7.4 Overcurrent Protection
Time setting range 0.01~10.00s
2.7.5 Pole Disagreement Protection
Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Date: 2016-03-22
2 Technical Data
2.7.6 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection
2.7.7 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection
Phase current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un
Zero-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Negative sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory .............................................................................. 3-a
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements .................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration................................................. 3-7
3.4 Function Configuration ................................................................................ 3-10
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-12
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element.............................................................................................. 3-13
3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.5.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-21
3.5.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.5.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.5.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection ............................................................. 3-29

3.6.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.6.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.6.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP) .................................................. 3-33

3.7.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-33
3.7.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.7.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-36

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection ............................................... 3-37

3.8.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-38
3.8.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-40
3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection ........................................................................ 3-41

3.9.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-43
3.9.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-45
3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection ........................................................... 3-50

3.10.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-50
3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-50
3.10.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-50
3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-50
3.10.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.10.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-52
3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) ................................................... 3-53

3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-55
3.11.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-55
3.11.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-57
3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................. 3-58


Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-61
3.12.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-63
3.12.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-64
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-67

3.13.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-70
3.13.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-75
3.14 VT Circuit Supervision................................................................................ 3-76

3.14.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-77
3.14.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker .......................................... 3-78

3.15.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-80
3.15.3 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-83
3.15.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-85
List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB ................................................................................................................ 3-1
Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)....................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-2
Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT) ....................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT) ..................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) ...................................................................... 3-4
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay 3-c

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) ............................ 3-5
Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT).............................. 3-6
Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) .......................... 3-7
Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) ............................. 3-7
Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement... 3-13
Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential

element ................................................................................................................................ 3-15
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element 3-17
Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................. 3-20
Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection.............................................................. 3-22
Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element ................................................... 3-24
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection....................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection ....................................................... 3-35
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection.................................................................................... 3-39
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection ......................................................................... 3-44
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-51
Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS ......................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP ........................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone) .......................... 3-56
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP ........................................................................................... 3-62
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure.................................................................................. 3-70
Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx CT circuit failure ......................................................................... 3-71
Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-72
Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-73
Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality ........................................................................ 3-74
Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-74
Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-75
3-d PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure .................................................................................. 3-77
Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm ............................................................ 3-80
Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm ............................................................. 3-81
Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position............................... 3-82
Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm............................................................................. 3-83
List of Tables
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software ............................................. 3-8
Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”........................................................... 3-9
Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software.................................... 3-10
Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP .................................................................... 3-17
Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection ................................................... 3-24
Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection................................................ 3-25
Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings ............................................................... 3-26
Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection................................................. 3-29
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection............................................ 3-32
Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection......................................... 3-32
Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings ............................................................... 3-33
Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-35
Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-36
Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings ........................................................ 3-36
Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection .......................................... 3-37
Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection............................................................. 3-39
Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection ......................................................... 3-40
Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings .................................................................. 3-40
Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection .......................................................... 3-40
Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection .............................................................. 3-45
Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-45
Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings........................................................................... 3-45
Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection ............................................................ 3-49
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay 3-e

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection ................................................ 3-51
Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection ............................................. 3-52
Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings ........................................................................................ 3-52
Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection .............................................. 3-53
Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................... 3-56
Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-57
Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings ........................................................ 3-57
Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection............................................ 3-63
Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-63
Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings ....................................................... 3-64
Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection ......................................... 3-67
Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-75
Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-78
Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector ......................................................................... 3-79
Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker ....................................................................... 3-80
Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker ....................... 3-83
Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker .................... 3-84
Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker .......................................................................... 3-85
3-f PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.1 Overview
PCS-915 can provide busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes
overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, dead zone fault
protection and breaker failure protection), feeder protection (includes overcurrent protection, pole
disagreement protection, dead zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), CT circuit
supervision and VT circuit supervision. For a specific project, some functions maybe not
configured or disabled according to user’s requirement.
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements

The following figures show the applications of PCS-915 for several typical busbar arrangements.
BB: busbar; BC: bus coupler; BS: bus section.
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * * * *
……
VT1
BB1
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
*
*
Bay1 Bay16 Bay32 (BS1) Bay17 Bay31
……
*
…… VT2
VT1
BB1 BB2
Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
*
Bay1 Bay16 Bay17 Bay30

Bay31 (BS1)
……
*
*
…… VT2
VT1 CT2 CT1
BB1 BB2
Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * …… * * …… *
…… *
Bay1 Bay10
VT1 VT2 VT3
* *
Bay31 (BS1) Bay32 (BS2)
BB1 BB2 BB3
Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
* * …… * * …… *
…… *
Bay1 Bay10 Bay11 Bay19 Bay20 Bay28
VT1 VT2 VT3

CT2 * * CT1 CT2 * * CT1
Bay29 (BS1) Bay30 (BS2)
BB1 BB2 BB3
Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
Bay2 …… Bay30
Bay1 Bay31
VT1
* BB1
VT2
Bay32 (BC1)
BB2
Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
Bay2 …… Bay29 Bay30
Bay1
VT1
CT2
* BB1
VT2
Bay31 (BC1)
* CT1 BB2
Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915-A
Panel B
PCS-915-B
* …… * * …… *
*
Bay1 Bay29
Bay30 (BS1)
VT1 VT1
BB1 BB1
* *
Bay32 (BC1) VT2 VT2 BC2
BB2 BB2
Bay31 (BS2)
*
Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915-A
Panel B
PCS-915-B
* …… * * …… *
*
Bay1 Bay28
Bay29 (BS1)
VT1 VT1
BB1 BB1
CT2 CT2 *
*
Bay31 (BC1) VT2 VT2 BC2
* CT1 CT1 *
BB2 BB2
Bay30 (BS2)
*
Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
VT1 …… …… VT3
*
Bay30 (BS1)
BB1 BB3 *
*
VT2 Bay31 (BC2)
Bay32 (BC1)
BB2
Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
VT1 …… …… VT3
CT2 * * CT1
Bay27 (BS1)
BB1 BB3
C
C
T
T
2
* *
VT2 Bay28 (BC2)
Bay29 (BC1)
* *
C
C
T
T
1
BB2
Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration

PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC
platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. Please refer to Chapter 9
for detailed configuration method about PCS-Explorer software.
MOT is provided for users to order the device. According to the selected series number of MOT,
the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware related function can be configured
via the PCS-Explorer software (Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software
Application
A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers
B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT) BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)
I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other arrangement, further modifications for
the program are required
Software Version
A: Standard 1 Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2 contents
Language
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS and GOOSE)
B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)
X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
Voltage Concerned Functions
A: With voltage concerned functions
B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports and Time Synchronization Mode
A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 The MON plug in module is NR1101F
(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + The MON plug in module is NR1102M
RS-232 (Printer) module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX The MON plug in module is NR1102N
(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Power Supply for Device

A: 110~250Vdc
1) “Voltage Concerned Functions”
If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected, all the voltage related functions will quit
(DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision will not function, busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection will not controlled by respective voltage controlled
element), and all settings and information related to voltage will be hidden.
If “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions”, voltage
related settings and information can be displayed, DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit
supervision are enabled, voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection and breaker
failure protection will be controlled by respective logic setting ([87B.VCE.En] and [50BF.VCE.En]).
2) “Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)”
In this option, if dual-position BI for disconnector is enabled, the device will get both normally
closed auxiliary contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the
position of the disconnector. If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled, the device will only get
normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector.
If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary
contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the device will only get normally closed auxiliary
contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker.
The concrete contents about the two options of “Software Version” are listed in following table.
Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”
Function Standard 1 Standard 2

Busbar differential protection √ √
BC/BS dead zone fault protection √ √
BC/BS breaker failure protection √ √
BC/BS pole disagreement protection √ √
BC/BS overcurrent protection √ √
BC/BS switch-onto-fault protection √ √
Feeder breaker failure protection √ √
Feeder dead zone fault protection √
Feeder pole disagreement protection √
Feeder overcurrent protection √
Configurable I/O, LED and programmable logic √ √
CT and VT circuit failure supervision (CTS, VTS) √ √
Timing standard: PPS, PPM, IRIG-B, SNTP √ √
NOTICE!
If “Standard 1” is selected for “Software Version”, feeder dead zone fault protection,

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
feeder pole disagreement protection and feeder overcurrent protection are disabled,
and all the related settings and information are hidden.
3.4 Function Configuration

The ancillary protection functions also can be configured via the PCS-Explorer software (Please
refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).
Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software
Basic information configuration
1 All protective function Enable/Disable
2 Phase-segregated breaker position Enable/Disable
3 Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP Enable/Disable
4 Enforced disconnector position Enable/Disable
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured

5 Enable/Disable
according to each bay
6 Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay Enable/Disable
7 System phase sequence ABC/ACB
Protective function configuration
8 Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable/Disable
9 Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection Enable/Disable
10 IDMT overcurrent characteristic Enable/Disable
1) “All protective function”
If it is set as “Enable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are enabled.
All the protective function will be controlled by [BI_En_Prot], [Link_Prot], their respective enabling
binary input and function link. If [BI_En_Prot] is de-energized or [Link_Prot] is set as “0”, all the
protective functions are disabled.
If it is set as “Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not
configured. All the protective function will only be controlled by their respective enabling binary
input and function link.
Takes BBP as an example, if “All protective function” is set as “Enable”, BBP can be enabled only
if [BI_En_Prot] and [87B.BI_En] are all energized and the function links [87B.Link] and [Link_Prot]
are set as “1”. If any condition is not met, BBP is disabled. If “All protective function” is set as
“Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not configured, and all
the protective functions will not be controlled by them.
2) “Phase-segregated breaker position”
If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated breaker position binary input is configured, if it is set as

“Disable”, three-phase breaker position binary input is configured.
3) “Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP”

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated tripping contact and three-phase tripping contact for
initiating breaker failure protection are configured, if it is set as “Disable”, only three-phase tripping
contact for initiating breaker failure protection is configured.
4) “Enforced disconnector position”
If it is set as “Enable”, and the corresponding enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS]
is set as “1”, the disconnector position of bay n will be decided by function link(s)
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..), if [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] is set as “1”, BBx disconnector
of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBn] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBm] are set as “1” at the same time (n≠m),
the corresponding alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued. If the enforced disconnector position
link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..) are all set as “0”, but
current is detected in bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued
simultaneously.
If it is set as “Disable”, the position status of disconnector is identified according to normally open
auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector.
5) Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according
to each bay
When it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary inputs and function links of feeder dead zone fault
protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection
are configured according to each bay. For each bay, disabling binary input is not configured.
When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one enabling binary input and function link of feeder dead
zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection for all bays.
Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary input and
function link of overcurrent protection is [@Bayn.50/51.BI_En] and [@Bayn.50/51.Link]
respectively (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the enabling binary input and function link of
overcurrent protection is [50/51.BI_En] and [50/51.Link] respectively (one for all bays).
6) Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay
When it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault
protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are configured according to
each bay.
When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection,
switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection for all bays.
Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [@Bayn.50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [@Bayn.50/51G.En] (ground
overcurrent protection) (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [50/51G.En] (one for all bays).
7) System phase sequence

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
This setting informs the device of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and
VT inputs on the device, labeled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B and C for
correct operation.
8) “Breaker failure protection re-tripping function”
When it is set as “Enable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be enabled, once BFP
operates, it will operate to re-trip concerned breaker after the time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp]. If it is
set as “Disable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be disabled and the time setting
for BFP [50BF.t_ReTrp] will be hidden.
9) “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection”
When it is set as “Enable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is enabled. Then if the releasing voltage controlled element binary input is
energized and the corresponding logic setting [Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1”, the
voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for the bay will be released. If the
releasing voltage controlled element binary input is energized for over 10s, it will be invalid and an
alarm signal will be issued.
When it is set as “Disable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is disabled.
10) “IDMT overcurrent characteristic”
When “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Enable”, there will be an option of IDMT
characteristic for both BC/BS overcurrent protection and feeder overcurrent protection. When
“IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Disable”, all settings related to IDMT characteristic will
be hidden.
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.5, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and
“@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus coupler
bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For
a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
section.
The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential

protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone
differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish
between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all
the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS (For the occasion that BS is at the
edge of the protected zone, BS will be taken as an feeder bay, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.2-9, the BS current will be included in check zone differential element). The discriminating zone
differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits
connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS.
Figure 3.5-1 shows a primary power system of double busbars with one BC (single CT)
arrangement, the two busbars are defined as busbar No.1 (BB1) and busbar No.2 (BB2)
respectively. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, and the polarity mark of BC CT
is on BB1 side.
For usual busbar system arrangement, the polarity mark definition are shown in Figure 3.2-1 to
Figure 3.2-11.
Discriminative Discriminative
Check zone
zone No.1 zone No.2
……
* * * *
BB1
*
BC1
BB2
Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement
NOTICE!
The protective device ONLY identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the
number of busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.5-1 as an example, if only
one CT is available at BC1, the protective device will refer the busbar of which the
polarity of BC1 CT is towards as BB1.
Discriminative zone No.1 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB1. Discriminative

zone No.2 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB2.
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element
PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are
DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of
these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
1. DPFC voltage FD element
When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD
element picks up, the operating criterion is:
Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un Equation 3.5-1
Where:
Δu: Instantaneous value of phase-to-ground DPFC voltage
ΔUFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing
0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element
will quit automatically.
2. DPFC current FD element
If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector
element will operate, the operating criterion is:
Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In Equation 3.5-2
Where:
Δsi: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current
change of all circuits/bays for check zone)
ΔSIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing
0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT.
3. Differential current FD element
When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will
operate. The operating criterion is:
ID> [87B.I_Pkp] Equation 3.5-3
Where:
ID: Differential phase current of check zone
[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.5.2 Function Description
3.5.2.1 Percentage Restraint Differential Element
The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential
element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element.
 Steady-state percentage restraint differential element
m
The differential current: ID = ∑Ij=1
j
m
The restraint current: IR = ∑I
j=1
j
The operating criterion is:
I D > [87B.I _ Pkp]

 Equation 3.5-4
 I D > KI R
Where:
K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element
Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-2.
ID
ID=IR Operation region
ID=kIR
[87B.I_Pkp]
IR
Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Take into consideration both the CT anti-saturation capability and the sensitivity of steady-state
check zone differential element for a fault occurred in the weak source bus zone when the BC
breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [87B.SlopeH_CZ, 87B.SlopeL_CZ] and
[87B.SlopeH_DZ, 87B.SlopeL_DZ] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminative
zones respectively.
When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint
differential protection will operate.
1. Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_CZ],
0.5 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with
low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_DZ], 0.5 is recommended) operates.
2. Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_CZ],
0.3 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with
high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_DZ], 0.6 is recommended) operates.
 DPFC percentage restraint differential element
The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of
busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The
busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element
and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient 0.2.
m
The DPFC differential current: ΔID = ∑ ΔI
j=1
j
m
The DPFC restraint current: ΔIR = ∑ ΔI
j=1
j
The operating criterion is:
ΔI D > ΔI DFloat + I DPickup


I D > 0.2I R Equation 3.5-5
 ΔI D > K / ΔI R

Where:
K': DPFC restraint coefficient
ΔIj: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
ΔIDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current
IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the
setting of [87B.I_Pkp]

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-4.
ΔID
ΔID=ΔIR
Operation region
ΔID=k'ΔIR
[87B.I_Pkp]
ΔIR
IRSet
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element
Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also
introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.65, 0.3] and [0.65,
0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively.
When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC
percentage restraint differential protection will operate.
1. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low
restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.
2. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high
restraint coefficient (0.65) operates.
Following table shows the restraint coefficients for DPFC differential element.
Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP
Check Zone Discriminative Zone

PCS-915
High Low High Low
DPFC differential element 0.65 0.3 0.65 0.5
3.5.2.2 Voltage Controlled Element of Busbar Differential Protection (VCE_BBP)
Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The operating criteria are:

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
UP ≤ [87B.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.5-6
3U0 ≥ [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] Equation 3.5-7
U2 ≥ [87B.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.5-8
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage (calculated internally)
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change.
UPP ≤[87B.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.5-9
U2 ≥[87B.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.5-10
Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
VCE_BBP will be controlled by the logic setting [87B.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BBP will be
disabled and busbar differential protection will not controlled by VCE_BBP
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BBP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
busbar differential protection will not controlled by voltage element.
Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), and the logic setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1”,
VCE_BBP is enabled.
If VCE_BBP (or VCE_BFP) of BBx operates for over 3s, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VCE] will be
issued.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.5.2.3 Faulty Busbar Zone Discrimination
The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire
busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The
discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to
individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone.
When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone
differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential
element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and
any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, voltage controlled element of BBP of any
connected busbar is released, the busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays
connected to the faulty busbar.
The protection has a feature of “inter-connection operation mode”, the feature will be effective
automatically under the following conditions.
1. A binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx] (x=1, 2, ……) is energized, it should be energized when two
bus zones are coupled together and unable to detach for a particular system operation
condition.
2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the
same time).
Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure
the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars
will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault.
3.5.2.4 Backup Busbar Differential Elements
If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation
detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the
corresponding circuit breakers (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Dly_Biased]). Stage 1 of
backup protection will trip BC/BS (when voltage controlled element of any busbar connected with
the BC/BS is released or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders of which current
is larger than 0.04*In and does not have disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup
protection will trip the feeders connected to the busbar of which voltage controlled element has
been released (or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders with current larger than
2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) after 480ms.
3.5.2.5 Detection of CT Saturation
Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation.
 CT saturation detector 1
When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT
saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element,
whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the
fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in
case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the
difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential
element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT
saturation.
 CT saturation detector 2
Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of

differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain
stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault
evolved to internal fault on the same phase.
The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar
differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected
area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.
Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault
Figure 3.5-4 shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT
saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme
case.
3.5.2.6 External Block Signal
PCS-915 provides a binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] to block BBP through external binary signal
(controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]). If [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk] is set as “1”, BBP will
be blocked if the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized. However, if the binary input
[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1 second, PCS-915 will issue an alarm [87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk]
and the blocking for BBP is released.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.5.2.7 Closing Binary Input
If feeder dead zone fault protection is enabled, in order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when
closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder is open, the feeder current is included in
differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes
from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s, an alarm
[@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.
3.5.3 Function Block Diagram
87B
87B.BI_ExtBlk 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.BI_En 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.BI_Blk
87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn
87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_52a
87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_52b
87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_A_52a 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_B_52a 87B.Op_DPFC
@Bayn.BI_C_52a 87B.Op_Biased
@Bayn.BI_A_52b 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
87B.Op
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
87B.Op_Dly1_Biased
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased
AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased
@BBx.AlmH_Diff 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased
@BCy.AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased
@BSz.AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased
@Bayn.BI_Cls 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased
87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased
87B.FD
87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk
87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
@BBx.Alm_VCE
87B.Alm_Off
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram.
3.5.4 Logic
BB1 logic is shown as follows as an example, logic of other bus zone(s) is(are) similar.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG Disconnector position abnormality
&
EN [87B.En_DSAlm_Blk]
EN [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]
0 1s
& ≥1
BI [87B.BI_ExtBlk]
SIG CT circuit failure
&
EN [87B.En_CTS_Blk]
n
tio
a
r
SIG DPFC DIF r u
t
to a
c s
e
t T
e C
SIG DPFC DIF 1 d
SIG DPFC current FD element 1

&
& 87B.Op_Trp@BB1_DPFC
≥1
SIG DPFC voltage FD element
SIG SP DIF (K=0.2)
&
SIG SP DIF 1 (K=0.2)
SIG HM REL 1
≥1
500ms 0
&
SIG SP DIF 1 &

& 87B.Op_Trp@BB1_Biased
SIG HM REL
≥1
≥1 Diff_BB1
500ms 0
&
SIG SP DIF
SIG 87B is enabled
SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP 1
& 87B.Op_Trp@BC1
SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP x
SIG SP DIF x
240ms 0
& 87B.Op_Dly1
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is
SIG
in service 480ms 0
87B.Op_Dly2
SIG Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In
& 87B.FD
SIG Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un ≥1
SET ID>[87B.I_Pkp]
Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection
Where:
Disconnector position abnormality: if current is detected in a bay but the bay has no disconnector
positions for any busbars.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
DPFC current FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.
DPFC voltage FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.
DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for check zone.
DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.
SP DIF: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for check zone.
SP DIF 1: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.
SP DIF x: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for any bus zone.
HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone.
HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1.
87B is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[87B.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [87B.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [87B.Link] and logic setting [87B.En] are set as “1”).
Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage

controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.
Voltage_Rls_BBP x: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage

controlled element of BBP of any busbar operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2.
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is in service: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by

VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of any energized busbar operates, please refer to
Section 3.5.2.2.
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by voltage controlled element) operates.
Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un， Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In， ID> [87B.I_Pkp]: Please refer to Section 3.5.1.
87B.FD: Any FD element for busbar differential protection picks up.
Different from BC, busbar differential protection operating to trip BS is not controlled by VCE_BBP.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG BBx is in service BBx is in service
SIG Ua<87B.VCE.U_Set
& 3s 0 @BBx.Alm_VCE
SIG Ub<87B.VCE.U_Set
VCE_BBP x
SIG UC<87B.VCE.U_Set ≥1
SIG 3U0>87B.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG U2>87B.VCE.U2_Set
SIG Ua<50BF.VCE.U_Set
≥1
SIG Ub<50BF.VCE.U_Set
SIG UC<50BF.VCE.U_Set ≥1
SIG 3U0>50BF.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG U2>50BF.VCE.U2_Set VCE_BFP x
&
SIG 50BF is enabled
Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element
Where:
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.
50BF is enabled: Please refer to Section 3.12.4.
VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection of BBx operates.
VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection of BBx operates.
@BBx.Alm_VCE: VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
3.5.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection
No. Signal Description
1 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling BBP
2 87B.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BBP
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
3 BI_En_IntLinkx
operation mode
4 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking BBP
5 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure
6 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure
7 @BSz.AlmH_CTS BSz CT circuit failure
Differential current high value alarm signal of BBx, discriminating zone

8 @BBx.AlmH_Diff
differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS] for over 5s.
9 @Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
10 @Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
11 @Bayn.BI_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
12 @Bayn.BI_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay

13 @Bayn.BI_A_52a
n
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay

14 @Bayn.BI_B_52a
n
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of

15 @Bayn.BI_C_52a
bay n
16 @Bayn.BI_A_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
17 @Bayn.BI_B_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
18 @Bayn.BI_C_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
19 @Bayn.BI_Cls Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n
Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection
1 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased Stage 1 of backup protection operates
2 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased Stage 2 of backup protection operates
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
5 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates
6 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates
7 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates
8 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates
9 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates
10 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates
Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

11 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx
Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

12 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx
Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

13 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx
14 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
15 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
16 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
17 87B.Op_Trp@BCy Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
18 87B.Op_Trp@BSz Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
19 87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
20 87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
21 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
22 87B.Op_A_Trp@BSz Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
23 87B.Op_B_Trp@BSz Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
24 87B.Op_C_Trp@BSz Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
25 87B.Op_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar
26 87B.Op_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar
DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential

27 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
protection operates to trip BBx

28 87B.Op
protection operates to trip any busbar
29 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s
Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks up for

30 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
over 10s
31 @BBx.Alm_VCE VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting

[87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be
32 87B.Alm_Off disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will
be issued
33 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s
3.5.6 Settings
 Busbar Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings
Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings
No. Name Range Step Remark
1 87B.I_Pkp 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Pickup value of differential current
High restraint coefficient for steady-state

2 87B.SlopeH_CZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 check zone, 0.5 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended
Low restraint coefficient for steady-state

3 87B.SlopeL_CZ 0.30-0.80 0.01 check zone, 0.3 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended
High restraint coefficient for steady-state

4 87B.SlopeH_DZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 discriminative zone, 0.6 is recommended,
less than 0.3 is not recommended
Low restraint coefficient for steady-state

5 87B.SlopeL_DZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 discriminative zone, 0.5 is recommended,
less than 0.3 is not recommended
6 87B.VCE.U_Set 0~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE for BBP
7 87B.VCE.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.01V Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Negative-sequence voltage setting of

8 87B.VCE.U2_Set 0~Un 0.01V
VCE for BBP
9 I_AlmH_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit failure
10 I_AlmL_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit abnormality
1: Enabling busbar differential protection

11 87B.En 0,1 1
0: Disabling busbar differential protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if BBP is

disabled
12 87B.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if BBP is
disabled
1: two stages of backup busbar differential

protection is enabled
13 87B.En_Dly_Biased 0,1 1
0: two stages of backup busbar differential
protection is disabled
1: breaker failure protection is initiated if

busbar differential protection operates to
14 87B.En_Init50BF 0,1 1 trip
0: breaker failure protection can not be
initiated by busbar differential protection
1: BBP is controlled by the binary input

[87B.BI_ExtBlk], once [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is
15 87B.En_BI_ExtBlk 0,1 1 energized, BBP will be blocked.
0: BBP will not be controlled by the binary
input [87B.BI_ExtBlk]
1: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can

be reset automatically after the CT circuit
returns to normal condition
16 En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS 0,1 1
0: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can
not be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition
1: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal

can be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition
17 En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS 0,1 1
0: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal
can not be reset automatically since the
CT circuit returns to normal condition
1: busbar differential protection is blocked

if CT circuit fails
0: busbar differential protection is not
18 87B.En_CTS_Blk 0,1 1
controlled by CT circuit failure
If it is not configured for a project, its
default value is “0”.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
1: If any disconnector position alarm is

issued, once the abnormality of
disconnector position disappears, the
alarm will be reset automatically.
19 En_AutoRecov_DS 0,1 1
0: If any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless
energizing the disconnector position
confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS]
Enabling busbar differential protection

being blocked by disconnector position
abnormality.
1: if current is detected in a feeder but the
feeder has no disconnector positions for
any busbars, busbar differential protection
20 87B.En_DSAlm_Blk 0,1 1
will be blocked.
0: busbar differential protection will not be
blocked for the disconnector position
abnormality condition.
“0” is recommended. If it is not configured
for a project, its default value is “0”.
1: BBP is controlled by VCE

21 87B.VCE.En 0,1 1
0: BBP will not be controlled by VCE
Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT.
1. [87B.I_Pkp]
It should ensure busbar differential protection sensitive enough under minimum fault level
condition and should be larger than maximum load current of its outlets (in order to prevent BBP
from mal-operation when CT secondary circuit fails).
2. [87B.VCE.U_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone.
The recommended value is 0.7Un (Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT). If the
system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the setting should be set as
phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings” in Chapter 7.
3. [87B.VCE.3U0_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode. It is invalid
if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”.
4. [87B.VCE.U2_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than the maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
mode.
5. [I_AlmL_CTS]
This setting is applied to better identifying the abnormality of CT circuit of light load feeder and
shunt of CT circuit, etc. It should be smaller than [I_AlmH_CTS] and can be set as
0.75*[I_AlmH_CTS].
6. [I_AlmH_CTS]
It should be larger than unbalance current in normal operation mode. The recommended value is
0.06In~0.1In.
 Function Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection
No. Symbol Remark

1 87B.Link
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

2 Link_IntLinkx
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
For BBP, the relation is “AND” among the function link [87B.Link], the corresponding enabling
binary input [87B.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [87B.En].
For [Link_IntLinkx], the relation is “OR” among the function link and the corresponding enabling
binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx].
3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.6, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.
One CT or two CTs can be configured for BC/BS. BC/BS dead zone fault protection can operate
under two conditions: BC/BS breaker is open or BC/BS breaker is closed.
3.6.1.1 One CT BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS that only one CT is available, there will be a blind spot for a fault occurs between
BC/BS breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar on the breaker side is

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, BC/BS dead zone fault protection is provided.
 Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is closed
After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has
been tripped but the BC/BS current is still detected, then after a time delay of [BC.50DZ.t_Op], the
BC/BS dead zone fault protection will operate to issue a signal and the BC/BS current will be
excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected
busbars.
 Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is open
If the two connected busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both
busbars from tripping for an dead zone fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element of the connected two busbars, busbar
differential protection will operate to trip the busbar directly connected to the CT to clear the dead
zone fault.
3.6.1.2 Two CTs BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS that double CTs are available, if BC/BS breaker is closed, there is no blind spot for a
internal fault, so BC/BS dead zone fault protection will not function.
If BC/BS breaker is open, BC/BS dead zone fault protection will function as same as that of one
CT BC/BS under the condition that BC/BS is open.
3.6.1.3 Special Situation
If BS current can affect the check zone differential current (such as BS in Figure 3.2-9, the BS
current will be calculated in check zone and discriminating zone differential current), dead zone
fault protection is not configured for the BS (the fault can be cleared by BS breaker failure
protection, refer to Section 3.11). The reason is: if the load current of BS CT is small, and the
breaker position of BS is abnormal (the actual breaker position is closed, but it is identified as open
for the device), then if dead zone fault protection is configured (the BS current is excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars), it will
lead the busbar differential protection mal-operate for an external fault.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
BB1
BC/BS CT
Dead zone fault
BC/BS Breaker
BB2
BC/BS 50DZ
87B.Op_Trp@BCy 50DZ.Op_@BCy
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
3.6.3 Logic
The logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as
an example).

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG BB1 is in service

&
SIG Ia_BC1<0.04In 0 400ms

&
SIG Ib_BC1<0.04In & &
SIG Ic_BC1<0.04In
SIG Breaker of BC1 is open

BC1 current is excluded from discriminating
zone percentage differential circuit
≥1
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1 &
SIG DIF_CZ
SIG Ia_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set] BC.50DZ.t_Op 0

&
SIG Ib_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set] ≥1
SIG Ic_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]
& @BC1.50DZ.Op
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1;
Breaker of BC1 is open: please refer to Section 0;
DIF_CZ: Check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient.
3.6.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx Busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
1 @BCy.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of BCy operates
2 @BSz.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of BSz operates
3.6.5 Settings
 BC Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings
Current setting for BC/BS dead zone fault

1 BC.50DZ.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
protection, 0.1In is recommended.
Time delay for BC/BS dead zone fault

2 BC.50DZ.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
protection, 150ms is recommended.
3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP)

NOTICE!
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.
In Section 3.7, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay.
3.7.1 Fault Detector Element
Feeder dead zone fault protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder DZP ([50DZ.FD]), as shown in Figure 3.7-1, if any phase current of feeder
bay n is larger than [Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] and current of feeder bay n is excluded from differential
current, FD element for feeder DZP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then
available and wait for the tripping signal from feeder DZP. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
If a fault occurs between breaker and busbar CT of a feeder bay, the fault can not be cleared even
the breaker is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, dead zone fault protection for each feeder
bay is provided.
If the breaker of a feeder is open, and three phase currents of the feeder are all smaller than 0.04In,
then the feeder current will be excluded from differential elements which prevent BBP from
mal-operation for the fault in the dead zone. For a fault occurred between circuit breaker and CT,
FD element of feeder DZP picks up for over the settable time delay [Fdr.50DZ.t_Op], dead zone
fault protection will operates and initiates transfer trip to trip remote circuit breaker.
In order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder
is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary
input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input
[@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10 second, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Busbar
Feeder breaker
Dead zone fault
Feeder CT
Feeder 50DZ
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50DZ.Op

@Bayn.BI_52a @Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_52b @Bayn.Alm_Cls
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
@Bayn.Alm_52b
@Bayn.BI_Cls
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En or @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk
3.7.4 Logic
The logic of dead zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.7-1.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG Ia_Bayn<0.04In
≥1
SIG Ib_Bayn<0.04In &
SIG Ic_Bayn<0.04In
0 1s
BI [@Bayn.BI_Cls]
SIG [@Bayn.Alm_52b] & Bay n current is not included in differential current

SIG TBD of bay n is closed
SIG Breaker of bay n is open
SIG Ia_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] @Bayn.50DZ.FD

Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0
SIG Ib_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] ≥1 & [@Bayn.50DZ.Op]
SIG Ic_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] [@Bayn.Op_TT]
SIG Bayn.50DZ is enabled
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection
Where:
@Bayn.50DZ.FD: FD element for feeder bay n dead zone fault protection picks up.
TBD of bay n is closed: transfer bus disconnector (TBD) of bay n is closed.
Bayn.50DZ is enabled: dead zone fault protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling
binary input ([Fdr.50DZ.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling
binary input [50DZ.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([Fdr.50DZ.Link] or [@Bayn.50DZ.Link]) and logic setting ([Fdr.50DZ.En] or [Bayn.50DZ.En]) are
set as “1”).
3.7.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
1 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
2 @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
3 Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

4 @Bayn.Alm_52b
current can still be detected in bay n

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection
1 @Bayn.50DZ.Op DZP of bay n operates
DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit

2 @Bayn.Op_TT
breaker
Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP FD element of bay n picks up for
3 @Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
over 10s
4 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s
3.7.6 Settings
 Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings
Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings
Current setting for feeder dead zone fault

1 Fdr.50DZ.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
protection, 0.1In is recommended.
Time delay for feeder dead zone fault

2 Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0.00~4.90s 0.01s
protection, 20ms is recommended.
Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault

protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Logic setting
of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
3 Bayn.50DZ.En 0,1 1
(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault
protection of bay n
Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault

protection, it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Logic setting of a
protective element is configured according to
4 Fdr. 50DZ.En 0,1 1 each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section
3.4)
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault
protection
 Function Link

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
1 Fdr.50DZ.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay

n (it is configured when the basic information configuration
“Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
2 @Bayn.50DZ.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
For feeder dead zone fault protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.
3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.8, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection, if any phase current of
BC/BS is larger than the current setting [50SOTF.I_Set], FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection
(@BCy.50SOTF.FD or @BSz.50SOTF.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is
then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS SOTF protection. The fault detector
output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
If a busbar is first energized via a BC or BS after maintenance or newly installed, a feature of

BC/BS SOTF is incorporated in the PCS-915 to trip the BC/BS immediately when it is closed on to
a fault.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SOTF protection is enabled if the following conditions are met.
1. The BC/BS CB status is in open position
2. BC/BS three phase-currents are smaller than 0.04In.
3. Any of the two connected busbars is out of service.
If any of the following conditions is met, SOTF protection will be disabled after 300ms
1. The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
2. BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04In to being larger than 0.04In.
3. Both connected busbars are in service.
If FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up in the duration when SOTF protection is
enabled, BC/BS SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS breaker without controlled by voltage
controlled element.
50SOTF
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp

Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
50SOTF.BI_Blk
50SOTF.BI_En or @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
3.8.4 Logic
The logic of BC/BS SOTF protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an
example).

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG Breaker of BC1 is open

0 300ms
& &
SIG BB2 is in service &
&
SIG Ia_BC1>0.04In
& @BC1.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SIG Ib_BC1>0.04In ≥1
SIG Ic_BC1>0.04In
SIG @BC1.50SOTF is enabled
SET Ia_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
& @BC1.50SOTF.FD
SET Ib_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection
Where:
@BC1.50SOTF.FD: FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.
@BC1.50SOTF is enabled: SOTF protection of BC1 is enabled (the corresponding enabling

binary input ([50SOTF.BI_En] or [@BC1.50SOTF.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50SOTF.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function
link ([50SOTF.Link] or [@BC1.50SOTF.Link]) and logic setting ([50SOTF.En] or
[@BC1.50SOTF.En]) are set as “1”).
3.8.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when

the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function
1 50SOTF.BI_En
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set
as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
2 @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
3 @BSz.50SOTF.BI_En
4 50SOTF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection
1 @BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of BCy operates
2 @BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of BSz operates
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BCy

3 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BSz

4 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
3.8.6 Settings
 Switch-onto-fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsSOTF Settings
Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings
1 50SOTF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS SOTF protection
Logic setting of SOTF protection of bay n

(only for BC/BS bay), it is configured when
the basic information configuration “Logic
setting of a protective element is
configured according to each bay” is set as
2 Bayn.50SOTF.En 0,1 1
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
Logic setting of BC/BS SOTF protection, it

is configured when the basic information
configuration “Logic setting of a protective
element is configured according to each
3 50SOTF.En 0,1 1
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
 Function Link
Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection
No. Symbol Remark
1 50SOTF.Link Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and

function link of a protective element is configured according to each
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS

bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
2 @Bayn.50SOTF.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
For BC/BS SOTF protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.9, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
PCS-915 provides two independent FD elements for OC protection of each bay (includes BC/BS
and each feeder), which are phase overcurrent FD element and ground overcurrent FD element. If
any of the two elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from OC protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for
500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
 Phase overcurrent FD element
When any phase current of bay n is larger than the threshold, phase overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51P.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:
Max(Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn) > [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
 Ground overcurrent FD element
When residual current of bay n is larger than the threshold, ground overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51G.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:
3I0_Bayn > [Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Overcurrent protection (50/51) includes phase overcurrent element (50/51P) and ground
overcurrent element (50/51G), if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/
[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is released, each overcurrent element can be configured as
inverse-time overcurrent protection (IDMT) or definite-time overcurrent protection by the setting
[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/ [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] (0: definite-time characteristic, 1: normal
inverse-time characteristic, 2: very inverse-time characteristic, 3: extremely inverse-time
characteristic, 4: long-time inverse-time characteristic, 5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic).
For overcurrent protection, the inverse-time characteristic complies with the following formula
(based on IEC60255-3 standard).
Kt
t(I ) = TMS
I
( )τ − 1
Ib
Where:
Ib is current setting. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting
[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set].
K t is time constant. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.K]. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.K]. When inverse-time characteristic is

chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to
the application.
TMS is time multiplier. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.TMS].
For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.TMS].
τ is exponent. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]. For phase
overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]. when inverse-time characteristic is
chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to the
application.
I for ground overcurrent protection, it is actual value of calculated residual current of bay n. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is actual value of measured maximum phase current of bay n.
t (I ) is calculated operating time of inverse-time overcurrent protection.
For phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, definite-time, four IEC
inverse-time characteristics and one user-defined inverse-time characteristic are available for
selection. It can be shown in the following table.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve
Kt τ
(Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve)
0: definite-time characteristic - -
1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02
2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1
3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2
4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1
Bayn.50/51P.K Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic
(Bayn.50/51G.K) (Bayn.50/51G.Alpha)
50/51
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
50/51.BI_Blk
@Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
50/51.BI_En or (@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
@Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
and @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En)
3.9.4 Logic
The logic of overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
&
@Bayn.50/51P.FD
≥1
SET [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]=0
[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op] 0
&
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
& ≥1
SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
&
SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
≥1 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
IDMT (Ia_Bayn)
SIG Bayn.50/51P is enabled &
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin] 0
IDMT (Ib_Bayn)
&
& ≥1
IDMT (Ic_Bayn)
&
&
& [Bayn.50/51G.t_Op] 0
SIG Bayn.50/51G is enabled
≥1 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
& IDMT (3I0_Bayn)
SET [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]=0 &

[Bayn.50/51G.tmin] 0
& @Bayn.50/51G.FD
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection
Where:
Bayn.50/51P.FD: Bay n phase overcurrent FD element picks up
Bayn.50/51G.FD: Bay n ground overcurrent FD element picks up
Bayn.50/51P is enabled: phase overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding

enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51P.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51P.En]) are set as
“1”).
Bayn.50/51G is enabled: ground overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding

enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51G.En]) are set

as “1”).
3.9.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of
1 50/51.BI_En
a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

2 @Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

3 @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En
4 50/51.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection
Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection
1 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
2 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of bay n

3 @Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of bay n

4 @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
3.9.6 Settings
 Overcurrent Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsOC Settings
Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings
Current setting for phase overcurrent

1 Bayn.50/51P.I_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n
Current setting for ground overcurrent

2 Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n
3 Bayn.50/51P.t_Op 0.01~10.00s 0.01s Definite time delay setting for phase

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
overcurrent protection of bay n
Definite time delay setting for ground

4 Bayn.50/51G.t_Op 0.01~10.00s 0.01s
overcurrent protection of bay n
Operating characteristic selection for phase

overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
5 Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).
Minimum time delay for inverse-time phase

6 Bayn.50/51P.tmin 0.01~10.00s 0.01s
Section 3.4).
Time constant for inverse-time phase

7 Bayn.50/51P.K 0~10000 0.01
Section 3.4).
Time multiplier for inverse-time phase

8 Bayn.50/51P.TMS 0.01~200 0.01
Section 3.4).
Exponent for inverse-time phase overcurrent

protection of bay n. This setting is displayed
9 Bayn.50/51P.Alpha 0.01~200 0.01 if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in
protective function configuration is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Operating characteristic selection for ground

10 Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
Section 3.4).
Minimum time delay for inverse-time ground

11 Bayn.50/51G.tmin 0.01~10.00s 0.01s overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory

Section 3.4).
Time constant for inverse-time ground

12 Bayn.50/51G.K 0~10000 0.01
Section 3.4).
Time multiplier for inverse-time ground

13 Bayn.50/51G.TMS 0.01~200 0.01
Section 3.4).
Exponent for inverse-time ground

14 Bayn.50/51G.Alpha 0.01~200 0.01
Section 3.4).
1: Enabling overcurrent protection operates

to initiate BFP
15 50/51.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling overcurrent protection operates
to initiate BFP
Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection

and ground overcurrent protection, it is
configured when the basic information
element is configured according to each bay”
16 50/51.En 0,1 1
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and
ground overcurrent protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection
and ground overcurrent protection
Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection

of bay n, it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Logic setting of a
17 Bayn.50/51P.En 0,1 1 protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of
bay n
Logic setting of ground overcurrent

protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Logic setting
of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
18 Bayn.50/51G.En 0,1 1
(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
In: Rated secondary current of reference CT
1. [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve Kt τ
0: definite-time - -
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51P.K Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
2. [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve Kt τ
0: definite-time - -
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51G.K Bayn.50/51G.Alpha
3. [Bayn.50/51P.tmin]/[Bayn.50/51G.tmin]

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
This is the minimum delay of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.

Recommended value: 0.1s.
4. [Bayn.50/51P.TMS]/[Bayn.50/51G.TMS]
This is the time multiplier setting ( TMS ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection coordinates with a line, the setting should be
graded with the inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection of the line.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection is used independently, it can be set according
to the actual requirement.
5. [Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K], [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]
[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K] and [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha] are respectively
the time constant ( K t ) and the exponent ( τ ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection,
which are set according to the model of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. They
are valid only when the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is set as “5”
(i.e. user-defined inverse-time characteristic is selected).
 Function Link
Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground

overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
1 50/51.Link “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it

is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
2 @Bayn.50/51P.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it

3 @Bayn.50/51G.Link binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
No. Symbol Remark
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
For overcurrent protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.10, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
PCS-915 provides independent pole disagreement FD element for PD protection of each bay
(includes BC/BS and each feeder). If pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized, FD element for PD protection of bay n (@Bayn.62PD.FD)
picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal
from PD protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault
detector element drop off.
For each bay, PD protection is necessary when pole disagreement of corresponding breaker is
detected due to three phases not in same status.
Pole disagreement protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker

i.e. the binary input [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD].
In addition to series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker, residual and negative

sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria.
62PD
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp
62PD.BI_En or @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
62PD.BI_Blk
3.10.4 Logic
The logic of pole disagreement protection is shown as follows.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
BI [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set] &

[@Bayn.62PD.t_Op] 0
≥1 & @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]
SIG Bayn.62PD is enabled

& @Bayn.62PD.FD
52b_A 52a_A
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
52b_B 52a_B
52b_C 52a_C
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection
Where:
@Bayn.62PD.FD: FD element for PD protection of bay n picks up.
3I0_Bayn, I2_Bayn: residual and negative sequence current of bay n.
Bayn.62PD is enabled: PD protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
([62PD.BI_En] or [@Bayn.62PD.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input
[62PD.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([62PD.Link] or
[@Bayn.62PD.Link]) and logic setting ([62PD.En] or [Bayn.62PD.En]) are set as “1”).
3.10.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection
1 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic

2 62PD.BI_En
Binary input of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link
3 @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
4 62PD.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling PD protection

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection
1 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp PD protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n picks up

2 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.BI_PD] is energized for over 10s)
3.10.6 Settings
 Protection Settings
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsPD Settings
Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings
1 Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A Residual current setting for PD protection
Negative-sequence current setting for PD

2 Bayn.62PD.I2_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection
3 Bayn.62PD.t_Op 0.01~10.00s 0.01s Time delay of PD protection
Logic setting of PD protection of bay n, it is

configured when the basic information
4 Bayn.62PD.En 0, 1 1 element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n
Logic setting of PD protection, it is configured

when the basic information configuration
“Logic setting of a protective element is
5 62PD.En 0, 1 1 configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection
0: Disabling PD protection
1: Enabling PD protection operates to initiate

BFP
6 62PD.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling PD protection operates to initiate
BFP
1. [Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]
It should be larger than maximum residual current under maximum fault level condition.
2. [Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current under maximum fault
level condition.
3. [Bayn.62PD.t_Op]
It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when breaker is in
the process of being closed.
 Function Link
Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
function link of a protective element is configured according to
1 62PD.Link
each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured

when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input
and function link of a protective element is configured according
2 @Bayn.62PD.Link
to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
For pole disagreement protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

NOTICE!
In Section 3.11, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.
For a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS BFP, if any of the following conditions is
fulfilled, FD element for BC/BS BFP (@BCy.50BF.FD or @BSz.50BF.FD) picks up, the positive
supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS BFP. The

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
1. BBP operates to trip BC/BS
2. Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary inputs [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] and common BFI
binary input [@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] are energized at the same time
3. BC/BS overcurrent protection operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])
4. BC/BS pole disagreement protection operates (controlled by the logic setting

[62PD.En_Init50BF])
BFI binary input [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] can be connected to an external tripping contact.

[@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] is a common BFI binary input, it will be energized if
[@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] is energized.
When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open
checked by the BC/BS current check element setting [BC.50BF.I_Set], BFP will operate to trip all
feeders connected to the two busbars (connected with the faulty BC/BS) after time delay of
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. BC/BS breaker failure protection is controlled by voltage controlled element of
BBP (Please refer to Section 3.5.2.2) if busbar voltage is available and applied.
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, BS breaker failure initiating (BFI) logic is applied and it can output a contact to energize the
breaker failure initiating binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.
Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example, for PCS-915-A, if differential element of BB1 operates
and BS current of any phase is larger than 0.04In, the BS breaker failure initiating contact will
operate and it can energize the binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of
PCS-915-B.
Ia_BS1>0.04In
Ib_BS1>0.04In ≥1
Ic_BS1>0.04In
& @BS1.BO_BFI
Diff_BB1
Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS
Where:
[@BSz.BO_BFI]: BS1 breaker failure initiating contact operates, it can be used to energize the
binary input [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.
Ia_BS1: Phase A current of BS1.
Ib_BS1: Phase B current of BS1.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Ic_BS1: Phase C current of BS1.
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates, please refer to
Figure 3.5-5.
The logic scheme of BFI of BS2 is similar to it.
BC/BS 50BF
@BCy.BI_BFI @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@BCy.BI_ChkBFI 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp BO_BFI_@BSz
@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp
50BF.Op
@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp
3.11.4 Logic
The logic of BC BFP is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
SET Ia_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET Ib_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG @BC1.62PD.Op_Trp
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG @BC1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BI [@BC1.BI_BFI] ≥1
& [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB2
BI [@BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
@BC1.50BF.FD
Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP
Where:
@BC1.50BF.FD: FD element for BC1 BFP picks up

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory

@BC1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BC1

operates ([@BC1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the logic of BS BFP is shown as follows (Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
SET Ia_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET Ib_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BS1
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG @BS1.62PD.Op_Trp
@BS1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG @BS1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
BI [@BS1.BI_BFI] ≥1
&
@BS1.50BF.FD
BI [@BS1.BI_ChkBFI]
Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone)
Where:
@BS1.50BF.FD: FD element for BS1 BFP picks up

@BS1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BSz

operates ([@BS1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BS1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
3.11.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection
3 @BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of BCy operates
4 @BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of BCy operates

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
5 @BSz.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of BSz operates
6 @BSz.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of BSz operates
7 @BCy.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of BCy operates
8 @BSz.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of BSz operates
9 @BCy.BI_BFI BFI binary input of BCy
10 @BCy.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of BCy
11 @BSz.BI_BFI BFI binary input of BSz
12 @BSz.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of BSz
Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection
1 @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB BCy BFP operates to trip busbar zone
2 @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB BSz BFP operates to trip busbar zone
3 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx
4 50BF.Op BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates
Binary input of initiating BCy BFP (@BCy.BI_BFI) is energized for over

5 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
10s.
Binary input of initiating BSz BFP (@BSz.BI_BFI) is energized for over

6 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI
10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy (@BCy.BI_ChkBFI) is

7 @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
continually energized for over 10s
The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz (@BSz.BI_ChkBFI) is

8 @BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
continually energized for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over
9 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over
10 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s
11 @BSz.BO_BFI BSz breaker failure initiating contact operates
3.11.6 Settings
 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBC BFP Settings
Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings
1 BC.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS BFP
2 BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.01~10.00s 0.01s Time delay of BC/BS BFP

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
1. [BC.50BF.I_Set]
It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC breaker. The change of power
system topology can influence the fault current after BBP operating.
2. [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
It should be larger than the maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC breaker.
3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.12, for a feeder bay, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding feeder bay.
Feeder breaker failure protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for feeder bay
n BFP picks up (@Bayn.50BF.FD), the positive supply to the output relays is then available and
wait for the tripping signal from feeder BFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after
the fault detector element drop off.
1. BBP operates to trip feeder bay n (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Init50BF])
2. Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary input (Phase-segregated or three-phase tripping contact)
and common BFI binary input [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] of feeder bay n are energized.
3. Overcurrent protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting

[50/51.En_Init50BF])
4. Pole disagreement protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting
[62PD.En_Init50BF])
Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder bay. When a breaker is determined failure to
trip, the BFP will operate to re-trip the breaker after time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp] (If “Breaker
failure protection re-tripping function” in protective function configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4) and the logic setting [50BF.En_ReTrp] is set as “1”). If the fault is still existed, the
breaker failure protection will trip BC after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBC] and all feeders after time
delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB]. BFP also provides the function to transfer trip the breaker of the remote
end of a line or intertrip the breakers on other sides of a main-transformer with the time delay of
[50BF.t_TrpBB].

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2.1 BFI Binary Input
For each feeder bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated
tripping contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding feeder
bay.
1. Phase-segregated tripping contact
[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of feeder bay n
[@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of feeder bay n
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of feeder bay n
2. Three-phase tripping contact
[@Bayn.BI_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of feeder bay n.
3. Common BFI binary input
[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] is the common BFI binary input, it will be energized if any of

[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI] is energized.
NOTICE!
When configure BFI binary inputs via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software, there are some
precautions, please refer to Section 6.4.3 about details.
3.12.2.2 Current Criterion
1. Current criterion 1
Phase current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
Residual current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
All these current criteria are controlled by the logic setting [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl], if this logic
setting is set as “0”, it can be regarded as that all these current criteria are met.
Current criterion 2 and current criterion 3 are also controlled by the logic setting of
[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] and [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] respectively.
NOTICE!
When calculating all the current setting of each bay, the primary current should be
converted to the secondary value according to the reference CT ratio instead of the
actual CT ratio of each bay.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2.3 Voltage Control Element of Breaker Failure Protection (VCE_BFP)
Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The criteria are:
UP≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.12-1
3U0≥[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] Equation 3.12-2
U2≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.12-3
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change.
UPP ≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.12-4
U2 ≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.12-5
Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BFP
VCE_BFP will be controlled by the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BFP will be
disabled and feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by VCE_BFP
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BFP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by voltage element.
Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), and the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1”,
VCE_BFP is enabled.
If the protective function configuration “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), then if the logic setting
[Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1” and the releasing voltage controlled element binary input
[@Bayn.50BF.BI_RlsVCE] is energized, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure
protection for bay n will operate.
Feeder 50BF
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp

Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx 50BF.Op_@TrpBCy
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx 50BF.Op_@TrpBSz
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp @Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_BFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
@Bayn.BI_A_BFI 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
@Bayn.BI_B_BFI 50BF.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_C_BFI 50BF.Alm_Off
@Bayn.50BF.BI_RlsVCE 50BF.Op
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
50BF.BI_En
50BF.BI_Blk
3.12.4 Logic
The logic of feeder BFP is shown as follows.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
EN [87B.En_Init50BF] &
SIG BBP operates to trip bay n
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF] &
SIG @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] >=1
&
SIG @Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp
BI [@Bayn.BI_BFI] &
BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
&
>=1 >=1
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] &
BI [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]
SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]
SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]
EN [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl] & >=1
>=1
&
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] & >=1
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
&
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] &
SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
& @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50BF.FD @Bayn.Op_TT
& [50BF.t_TrpBB] 0 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
&
SIG 50BF is enabled [50BF.t_TrpBC] 0 50BF.Op_Trp@BC
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
SIG VCE_BFP x
&
SIG VCE_BFP is disabled ≥1 [50BF.t_ReTrp] 0 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp
BI [@Bayn.50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
&
&
EN Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE
SIG Disconnector position of BBx
EN [50BF.En_ReTrp]
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP
Where:
@Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of bay n

operates ([@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
50BF is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
[50BF.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50BF.BI_Blk] is de-energized

and the corresponding enabling function link [50BF.Link] and logic setting [50BF.En] are set as
“1”).
VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element for BFP of any connected BBx, please refer to Section
3.12.2.3.
VCE_BFP is disabled: “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned
Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is
set as “0”.
Disconnector position of BBx: which busbar the bay is connected to (according to disconnector
position of the bay).
@Bayn.50BF.FD: FD element for feeder bay n BFP picks up.
3I0_Bayn: The residual current of bay n.
I2_Bayn: The negative sequence current of bay n.
Ia_Bayn: The phase A current of bay n.
Ib_Bayn: The phase B current of bay n.
Ic_Bayn: The phase C current of bay n.
3.12.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection
1 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder BFP
2 50BF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder BFP
3 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
4 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
5 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates
6 @Bayn.BI_BFI Three-phase BFI binary input of bay n
7 @Bayn.BI_A_BFI Phase-A BFI binary input of bay n
8 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B BFI binary input of bay n
9 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C BFI binary input of bay n
10 @Bayn.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of bay n
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker

11 @Bayn.50BF.BI_RlsVCE
failure protection of bay n
Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection
1 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the feeder breaker

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
2 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy BFP operates to trip BCy breaker
3 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz BFP operates to trip BSz breaker
4 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx
5 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB BFP of bay n operates to trip busbar zone
6 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC BFP of bay n operates to trip BC/BS
7 50BF.Op BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates
DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote

8 @Bayn.Op_TT
circuit breaker
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of bay n

9 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI (BI_A_BFI_@Bayn, BI_B_BFI_@Bayn, BI_C_BFI_@Bayn or
BI_BFI_@Bayn) is energized for over 10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of bay n

10 @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
(@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker

11 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
failure protection is energized for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BFP of any bay picks
12 50BF.Alm_Pkp
up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting

[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled
13 50BF.Alm_Off (feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling
binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm
signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued
3.12.6 Settings
 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsFdr BFP Settings
Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings
Time delay of feeder BFP operating

1 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.01~10.00s 0.01s
to re-trip breaker

2 50BF.t_TrpBC 0.01~10.00s 0.01s
to trip BC breaker

3 50BF.t_TrpBB 0.01~10.00s 0.01s
to trip busbar zone
Under voltage setting of VCE of

4 50BF.VCE.U_Set 0~Un 0.01V
BFP
Residual voltage setting of VCE of

5 50BF.VCE.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.01V
BFP
6 50BF.VCE.U2_Set 0~Un 0.01V Negative-sequence voltage setting

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
of VCE of BFP
Phase current setting of BFP of bay

7 Bayn.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
n
Residual current setting of BFP of

8 Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
bay n
Negative sequence current setting

9 Bayn.50BF.I2_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
of BFP of bay n
Residual current criterion of BFP of

10 Bayn.50BF.En_3I0 0, 1 1
bay n is enabled or not
Negative sequence current criterion

11 Bayn.50BF.En_I2 0, 1 1
of BFP of bay n is enabled or not
1: the binary input of releasing

voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is enabled
12 Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE 0, 1 1 0: the binary input of releasing
voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is
disabled
Logic setting of breaker failure

protection
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure
13 50BF.En 0, 1 1
protection
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure
protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if

feeder BFP is disabled
14 50BF.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if
feeder BFP is disabled
Current criterion of BFP is enabled

15 50BF.En_Current_Ctrl 0, 1 1
or not
1: Enabling re-tripping function for

feeder breaker failure protection
16 50BF.En_ReTrp 0,1 1
0: Disabling re-tripping function for
feeder breaker failure protection
1: BFP is controlled by VCE of BFP

17 50BF.VCE.En 0, 1 1 0: BFP is not controlled by VCE of
BFP
1. [50BF.t_ReTrp]

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
It should be larger than 100ms and smaller than the setting [50BF.t_TrpBC]. The recommended
value is 0.15s. The function of re-tripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set the same as
[50BF.t_TrpBC].
2. [50BF.t_TrpBC]
It should be larger than the sum of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective device
with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms.
3. [50BF.t_TrpBB]
On the premise that BC breaker is tripped, the value of [50BF.t_TrpBB] should be greater than the
sum of operating time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It
should be as short as possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is
500ms~600ms.
4. [50BF.VCE.U_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when a symmetrical fault occurs at the remote
end of the longest feeder but not operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is cleared,
the protective device can reset reliably. If the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as
“1”, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings
in Chapter 7.
5. [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal
operation mode. It is invalid if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”.
6. [50BF.VCE.U2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum negative sequence voltage in
normal operation mode.
7. [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring at the remote end
of feeder or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
maximum load under maximum fault level condition. In case of complying maximum load current
will not meet the sensitivity requirement, sensitivity requirement has the priority.
8. [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault occurring at the
remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater
than the maximum residual current in normal operation mode.
9. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring at

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be
greater than the maximum negative sequence current in normal operation mode.
10. [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
11. [Bayn.50BF.En_I2]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
 Function Link
Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection

1 50BF.Link
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
For feeder breaker failure protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [50BF.Link], the
corresponding enabling binary input [50BF.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [50BF.En].
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision

3.13.1.1 CT Circuit Failure
1. If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS], CT
circuit failure alarm of corresponding phase [AlmH_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be issued and
BBP of corresponding phase will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as
“1”) with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the
alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically
after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT”
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.
2. For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and both discriminating zone differential currents of
the phase of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 3s and BBP will not be blocked, but the inter-connected
operation mode will be enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any internal fault occurs
on any of the two connected busbars, the device will not identify the faulty busbar. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting

[En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT”
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition.
3. For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 3s and BBP of corresponding phase will be blocked.
When “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) and VT circuit failure is not detected, CT circuit
supervision will cease if VCE of any busbar operates. If “B: Without voltage concerned functions”
is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration, CT circuit supervision will
not be affected by voltage.
3.13.1.2 CT Circuit Abnormality
1. If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting i.e. [I_AlmL_CTS],
CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [AlmL_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be
issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset
automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing
the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously
(“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to
normal condition.
2. For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and both discriminating zone currents of the phase
of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit abnormality
alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will be issued
with a time delay of 3s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, BC/BS
CT circuit abnormality can be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be
reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only
by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS
CT circuit returns to normal condition.
3. For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], if the discriminating zone

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 3s.
4. BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.
3.13.1.3 Discriminating Zone Differential Current High/Low Value Alarm (When Double CTs
are Available for BC/BS)
1. If discriminating zone differential current of one phase of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS],
BBx differential current low value alarm of corresponding phase [@BBx.AlmL_Diff_X] (X=A, B
or C) will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is
set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential
current returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as
“0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current
returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting binary input
[BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two
keypads on the front of the device) after the discriminating zone differential current returns to
normal condition.
2. If discriminating zone differential current of one phase of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS],
BBx differential current high value alarm of corresponding phase [@BBx.AlmH_Diff_X] (X=A,
B or C) will be issued with a time delay of 5s and discriminating zone differential circuit of
corresponding phase of BBx will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as
“1”). If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset
automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition. If
the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset
automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition, it
can be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then
“ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition.
NOTICE!
Logic execution priority: check zone CT circuit failure alarm logic > single-CT BC/BS CT
circuit failure alarm to enable inter-connected operation mode logic > discriminating
zone differential current high value alarm logic.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
CTS
AlmH_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X
AlmL_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X
@BBx.AlmH_Diff_X
@BBx.AlmL_Diff_X
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X
X=A, B or C
3.13.3 Logic
5s 0
SET Ida_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_A
5s 0
SET Idb_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_B
5s 0
SET Idc_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_C
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure
Where:
Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current
Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current
Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current
I_AlmH_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit failure
AlmH_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-A will be blocked by it if the
logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”.
AlmH_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-B will be blocked by it if the
AlmH_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-C will be blocked by it if the
When double CTs are available for BC/BS, the following logic will be enabled.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
5000ms 0
SET Ida_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS] @BBx.AlmH_Diff_A
5000ms 0
SET Idb_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS] @BBx.AlmH_Diff_B
5000ms 0
SET Idc_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS] @BBx.AlmH_Diff_C
Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx CT circuit failure
Where:
Ida_BBx: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BBx
Idb_BBx: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BBx
Idc_BBx: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BBx
@BBx.AlmH_Diff_A: Phase-A BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of
busbar differential protection of phase-A will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of
respective zones.
@BBx.AlmH_Diff_B: Phase-B BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of
busbar differential protection of phase-B will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of
respective zones.
@BBx.AlmH_Diff_C: Phase-C BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of
busbar differential protection of phase-C will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of
respective zones.
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
3s 0
SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
&
SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
3s 0
SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
&
SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
3s 0
SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
&
SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
Where:
Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1
Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1
Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit failure.
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit failure.
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit failure.
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
SIG Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣ 3s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
≥1
&
SIG Ida_BB2=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
SIG Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣ 3s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
≥1
&
SIG Idb_BB2=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
SIG Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣ 3s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
≥1
&
SIG Idc_BB2=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣
Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
Where:
Ia_BC1_CT1: Phase-A current of CT1 of BC1
Ib_BC1_CT1: Phase-B current of CT1 of BC1
Ic_BC1_CT1: Phase-C current of CT1 of BC1
Ia_BC1_CT2: Phase-A current of CT2 of BC1
Ib_BC1_CT2: Phase-B current of CT2 of BC1
Ic_BC1_CT2: Phase-C current of CT2 of BC1

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
5s 0
SET Ida_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_A
5s 0
SET Idb_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_B
5s 0
SET Idc_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_C
Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality
Where:
I_AlmL_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
3s 0
SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
&
SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
3s 0
SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
&
SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
3s 0
SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
&
SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
Where:

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
@BC1.AlmL_CTS: BC1 CT circuit abnormality
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
SIG Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣ 3s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
≥1
&
SIG Ida_BB2=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
SIG Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣ 3s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
≥1
&
SIG Idb_BB2=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
SIG Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣ 3s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
≥1
&
SIG Idc_BB2=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣
Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
3.13.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision
1 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
2 AlmH_CTS_A Phase-A CT circuit failure
3 AlmH_CTS_B Phase-B CT circuit failure
4 AlmH_CTS_C Phase-C CT circuit failure
5 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure
6 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_A BCy phase-A CT circuit failure
7 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_B BCy phase-B CT circuit failure
8 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_C BCy phase-C CT circuit failure
9 @BSz.AlmH_CTS BSz CT circuit failure
10 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_A BSz phase-A CT circuit failure
11 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_B BSz phase-B CT circuit failure
12 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_C BSz phase-C CT circuit failure
13 AlmL_CTS CT circuit abnormality
14 AlmL_CTS_A Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
15 AlmL_CTS_B Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
16 AlmL_CTS_C Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
17 @BCy.AlmL_CTS BCy CT circuit abnormality
18 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_A BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality
19 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_B BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality
20 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_C BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality
21 @BSz.AlmL_CTS BSz CT circuit abnormality
22 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_A BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality
23 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_B BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality
24 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_C BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality
25 @BBx.AlmH_Diff BBx differential current high value alarm
26 @BBx.AlmH_Diff_A BBx phase-A differential current high value alarm
27 @BBx.AlmH_Diff_B BBx phase-B differential current high value alarm
28 @BBx.AlmH_Diff_C BBx phase-C differential current high value alarm
29 @BBx.AlmL_Diff BBx differential current low value alarm
30 @BBx.AlmL_Diff_A BBx phase-A differential current low value alarm
31 @BBx.AlmL_Diff_B BBx phase-B differential current low value alarm
32 @BBx.AlmL_Diff_C BBx phase-C differential current low value alarm
3.14 VT Circuit Supervision

1. If negative sequence voltage (U2) of BBx is larger than 0.04Unn (Unn: secondary rated
phase-to-phase voltage of VT) and fault detector element does not pick up, an alarm

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
[@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.
2. If BBx is in service and the scalar sum of three phase-voltage (|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) of BBx is
smaller than Un (Un: secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage of VT) and fault detector
element does not pick up, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of
1.25s.
3. When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, if busbar negative

sequence voltage (U2) is larger than 0.04Unn, or any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than
0.7Unn, an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.
If VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will be disabled. When the three
phase-voltage returns to normal condition, the alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically
with a time delay of 10s.
If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system (DPFC current is
detected), the VT circuit supervision will be disabled for 3s.
VTS
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BBx.Alm_VTS
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx
3.14.3 Logic
SIG Ua>0.7Un
SIG Ub>0.7Un
≥1 BBx is in service
SIG Uc>0.7Un
SIG IΨ_Bayn>0.04In
│ Ua│ +│ Ub│ +│ Uc│ < &

SIG
Un
EN [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
≥1
& 1.25s 10s
& @BBx.Alm_VTS
SIG Uab<0.7Unn
SIG Ubc<0.7Unn ≥1
SIG Uca<0.7Unn
SIG U2>0.04Unn
SIG Any FD element picks up
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure
Where:
Ua: Phase-A voltage of BBx

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Ub: Phase-B voltage of BBx
Uc: Phase-C voltage of BBx
Uab, Ubc, Uca: Phase-to-phase voltage of BBx
U2: Negative-sequence voltage of BBx
Un: The rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT
Unn: The rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT
IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of any feeder bay connected to BBx
In: The rated secondary current of reference CT
Any FD element picks up: Any fault detector element picks up
@BBx.Alm_VTS: BBx VT circuit failure
3.14.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision
1 @BBx.Alm_VTS BBx VT circuit failure
3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker

NOTICE!
In Section 3.15, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar
and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
In a substation with double-busbar layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other
busbar during operation. Thus it is necessary to identify the real time topology of busbar correctly.
PCS-915 offers disconnector positions element and self-diagnosis function to assist in identifying
the real time busbar topology.
If BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time (n≠m),
an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued simultaneously. If the two disconnectors returns to
normal condition, the alarm will reset automatically.
If an abnormality of disconnector position of bay n is detected, the disconnector position alarm

[@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously in any of the following cases.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
1. Current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for dual busbars
(the two disconnectors that the feeder connect to the two busbar are open). In this case, the
protective device will use the latest disconnector position instead and its validity will be
checked based on the current distribution of the system.
2. The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In and the check zone
differential current is smaller than 0.06In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) due
to one feeder of which the disconnector position is wrong, disconnector position alarm will be
issued and the device can identify the correct disconnector position based on the current
distribution of system. The logic diagram is shown in Figure 3.15-3.
If any disconnector position alarm is issued, if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “1”
(refer to Section 3.5.6), once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be
reset automatically. if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be
reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] or carry out
the disconnector position confirming command by navigating the path “Local Cmd”->“Confirm
Disconnector”.
Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from miss-operation caused by the lost of feeder
disconnector position, regardless which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the feeders of which
current is larger than 0.04*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) but no disconnector
position can be detected will be tripped.
If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally open auxiliary
contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker
is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to
identify the position status. If dual-position BI for disconnector (circuit breaker) is enabled (refer to
Section 3.3), both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of
disconnector (circuit breaker) are used to identify the position status.
If only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status,
once normally closed auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
circuit breaker will be identified as open, otherwise it is closed.
If only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status, once
normally open auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
disconnector will be identified as closed, otherwise it is open.
If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector or
circuit breaker are used to identify the position status, the following tables show the principle.
Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector
Normally closed auxiliary

Normally open auxiliary contact Position status
contact
0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
0 0 the last valid memorized position

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
1 1 Closed
Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker
Normally closed auxiliary

Normally open auxiliary contact Position status
contact
0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
0 0 Closed
1 1 Closed
If normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n circuit breaker is energized but current is still be
detected in corresponding bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52b] will be issued without blocking
the protective device.
If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3), when circuit breaker of bay n
is in maintenance, the corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] should be set as “1”
and the circuit breaker will be regarded as open, otherwise the alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52a/52b]
will be issued once circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker
is disabled, the function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] is not configured.
3.15.2 Logic
3.15.2.1 Inter-connection Mode Alarm Logic
BI @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
Bay n is connected to BB1
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
&
& Alm_IntLink1
SIG Dual-position DS
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2 Bay n is connected to BB2
&
Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm
Where:
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3).
Alm_IntLink1: BB1 disconnector and BB2 disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same
time
3.15.2.2 Disconnector Position Alarm Logic
SIG Bayn DS position changes

&
EN En_AutoRecov_DS
SIG Bay n is connected to BB1 ≥1 Bayn.Alm_DS

&
SIG Bay n is connected to BB2
&
SIG IΨ_Bayn>0.04In
Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm
Where:
Bayn DS position changes: Disconnector position of bay n changes (from open change to closed
or from closed change to open)
En_AutoRecov_DS: 1: Logic setting of busbar differential protection. When it is set as “1”, if any
disconnector position alarm is issued, once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears,
the alarm will be reset automatically. When it is set as “0”, if any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input
[BI_ConfirmDS]
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic
IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of feeder bay n
@Bayn.Alm_DS: Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
3.15.2.3 Disconnector Position Automatic Correction Logic
Takes BB1 as an example

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG Ida_CZ<0.06In
SIG Idb_CZ<0.06In &
SIG Idc_CZ<0.06In
SIG Ida_BB1>0.08In
SIG Idb_BB1>0.08In &
SIG Idc_BB1>0.08In
SIG Ida_BB2<0.08In
≥1 Bay n is identified connected to BB1
SIG Idb_BB2<0.08In &
&
SIG Idc_BB2<0.08In
SIG Ia_Bayn=Ida_BB1
SIG Ib_Bayn=Idb_BB1 &
SIG Ic_Bayn=Idc_BB1

≥1
Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position
Where:
Ida_BB1 (Ida_BB2): Phase-A discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Idb_BB1 (Idb_BB2): Phase-B discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Idc_BB1 (Idc_BB2): Phase-C discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Ia_Bayn: Phase-A current of feeder bay n
Ib_Bayn: Phase-B current of feeder bay n
Ic_Bayn: Phase-C current of feeder bay n
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic
3.15.2.4 Dual-Position Alarm Logic
Takes BB1 as an example

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG Dual-position DS
&
& @Bayn.Alm_89a/89b_@BB1
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1 ≥1
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
SIG Dual-position CB
BI @Bayn.BI_52a
&
BI @Bayn.BI_52b ≥1 & @Bayn.Alm_52a/52b
BI @Bayn.BI_52a
&
BI @Bayn.BI_52b
EN @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm
Where:
Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
Dual-position CB: Dual-position for circuit breaker status, it can be configured during MOT
@Bayn.Alm_89a/89b_@BBx: Dual-position alarm for BB1 disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.BI_52a: Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
@Bayn.BI_52b: Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

@Bayn.Link_Maintenance: Logic link to indicate circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance
@Bayn.Alm_52a/52b: Dual-position alarm for circuit breaker of bay n
3.15.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled
3 @Bayn.BI_52a
(refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic
information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
4 @Bayn.BI_52b signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic
information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.

The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is
5 @Bayn.BI_A_52a
enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position”
in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.

The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is
6 @Bayn.BI_B_52a
enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position”
in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay

n. The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker
7 @Bayn.BI_C_52a is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker
position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.

The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker
8 @Bayn.BI_A_52b
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.

9 @Bayn.BI_B_52b
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n.

10 @Bayn.BI_C_52b
Section 3.4).
11 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input.
Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker
1 @Bayn.Alm_DS Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
2 Alm_DS Disconnector position of any bay is abnormal.
BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are

3 Alm_IntLink
closed at the same time
4 @Bayn.Alm_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory
current can still be detected in bay n
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n breaker

are energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s (if both
5 @Bayn.Alm_52a/52b
normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact
of circuit breaker are used to identify the position status)
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx

6 @Bayn.Alm_89a/89b_@BBx disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for
over s 5s
3.15.4 Settings
 Function Link
Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker
No. Symbol Remark
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance.

1 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance.

Date: 2016-03-22
3 Operation Theory

Date: 2016-03-22
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hardware Supervision ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Setting Supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment............................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Sample Supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2

4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS).............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision ...................................................................................... 4-2
4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3
List of Tables
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3

Date: 2015-06-29
4 Supervision

Date: 2015-06-29
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic
supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault
to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is lightened,
the equipment needs to be checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision
function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and during normal
operation, plays an important role.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work and alarm output contacts [BO_ALM] in PWR module will be given. However, if
severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and
the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts [BO_FAIL] in PWR module
will be given. The protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to
eliminate the failure.
When an abnormality or a failure is detected by automatic supervision, besides alarm output

contacts or blocking output contacts are energized, it is also followed with an LCD message and
LED indication, at the same time event recording will record the failure alarm which can be viewed
in event recording report and be printed.
4.2 Protective Device Supervision
4.2.1 Hardware Supervision

The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on DSP module of central
unit and each bay unit to ensure they are healthy. Corresponding alarm signal [CU.Fail_DSP] or
[BUj.Fail_DSP] will be issued with the device being blocked if any damages or errors are detected.
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision

The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler for
the central unit and each bay unit, if a failure or damage is detected, the corresponding alarm
signal [CU.Alm_OptoDC] or [BUj.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued.
4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision

The state of binary outputs of central unit and bay units is continually monitored. If any abnormality
is detected, the corresponding alarm signals [CU.Alm_Output] and [BUj.Alm_Output] will be
issued. If [BUj.Alm_Output] is issued, the corresponding bay unit will be blocked.
4.2.4 Setting Supervision

The central unit has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of
active setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal
[Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued with the protective device be blocked.
If the EEPROM on DSP module is damaged, it will lead to any summation error of all setting
groups, the alarms [B02.Fail_Settings] (protection DSP module) or [B03.Fail_Settings] (fault

Date: 2015-06-29
4 Supervision
detector DSP module) will be issued with the protective device blocked.
4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision

Module configuration is checked automatically during device initialization, if the plug-in module
configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal
[Fail_BoardConfig] is issued with the device being blocked.
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision
4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment

The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment
factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal
value.
4.3.2 Sample Supervision

The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage sampled by each bay unit. If the
detected values of BUj are wrong or inconsistent between two ADCs of NR1161 module, an alarm
[BUj.Alm_Sample] will be issued and busbar differential protection will be blocked.
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision
4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)

The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage
measured is the actual value of power system. When VT failure is detected, device can
automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements of which the stability would be
affected and might lead to mal-operation. Please refer to Section “VT Circuit Supervision” in
Chapter 3 for detail.
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)

The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual
value of power system. The main purpose of CTS is to ensure the integrity of the CT circuits
maintaining the performance of protective equipment. Please refer to Section “CT Circuit
Supervision” in Chapter 3 for details.
4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision

Disconnector position is monitored by the automatic supervision function to ensure the correct
operation of protective device. Please refer to Section “Position of disconnector and circuit
breaker” in Chapter 3 for details.

Date: 2015-06-29
4 Supervision
4.5 Handle Alarm
PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any unnormal condition is detected, the fault information
or report can be displayed and a corresponding alarm will be issued.
NOTICE!
If alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages BUT
NOT simply reboot or re-power the relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform the manufacturer or the agent for
maintenance.
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report
Indicator LED Repairmen

No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM CH ALM suggestion
The signal is issued

with other specific
alarm signals, and
1 Fail_Device OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF The device fails. please refer to the
handling suggestion
other specific alarm
signals.
The signal is issued

with other specific
alarm signals, and
2 Alm_Device GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF The device is abnormal. please refer to the
handling suggestion
other specific alarm
signals.
PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Protection 4-3

4 Supervision

Users may pay no

attention to the alarm
signal in the project
commissioning stage,
but it is needed to
download the latest
package file (including
correct version
checksum file)
provided by R&D
engineer to make the
The error is found during checking the
alarm signal
3 Alm_Version GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF version of software downloaded to the
disappear. Then users
device.
get the correct
software version. It is
not allowed that the
alarm signal is issued
on the device already
has been put into
service. the devices
having being put into
service so that the
alarm signal
disappears.
The memory of MON plug-in module is Please replace MON

4 Alm_Insuf_Memory GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
insufficient. plug-in module.

4 Supervision

Please check the

settings mentioned in
the prompt message
on the LCD, and go to
After configure file is updated, settings of the menu “Settings”
5 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF the file and settings saved on the device and select “Confirm
are not matched. Settings” item to
confirm settings.
Then, the device will
restore to normal
operation stage.
Please reset setting

values according to
the range described in
the instruction manual,
then re-power or
reboot the equipment
6 Fail_Setting_OvRange OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Setting value is out of setting scope.
and the alarm
message will
disappear and the
equipment will restore
to normal operation
state.
Management procedure will upload and Put the protective

7 Alm_Settings_MON GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
check the parameters and settings of each device out of service

4 Supervision

protection plug-in module regularly, if the at once. Inform the

parameters and settings are inconsistent, factory or agency to
the alarm signal will be issued. maintain it.
8 Process_Exit OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF System process of MON module exits.
9 Alm_MON GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF MON module is under abnormal condition.
Mismatch between the configuration of

10 Fail_BoardConfig OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF plug-in boards and the designing drawing
of a specific project.
Binary output or input module located in

11 Bx.Fail_Board OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
slot No.x works abnormally.
The EEPROM in the DSP module located

12 Bx.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
in slot No.x is damaged.
Any chip on DSP module of the central unit

13 CU.Fail_DSP OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
is damaged or error.
Driving transistors of binary output module

14 CU.Alm_Output GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
of the central unit are damaged
Driving transistors of binary output module

15 BUj.Alm_Output GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
of BUj are damaged
Put the corresponding
Sampled values of BUj are different
16 BUj.Alm_Sample GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF bay unit out of service
between two ADCs of NR1123C
at once. Inform the
Any chip on DSP module of BUj is
17 BUj.Fail_DSP OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF factory or agency to
damaged or error.
maintain it.
Voltage level of DSP module of BUj is
18 BUj.Alm_Pwr_Device GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
abnormal

4 Supervision

19 BUj.Alm_Syn GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Synchronism of BUj is abnormal Check the optical fibre
Receiving data from bay unit No.j is from the central unit to
20 BUj.Alm_RecvCU GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF YELLOW
abnormal BUj
Check the optical fibre

Receiving data from the central unit for bay
21 CU.Alm_RecvBUj GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF YELLOW from BUj to central
unit No.j is abnormal
unit
Check the
corresponding optical
fibre connection firstly,
22 BUj.Alm_FOConnect GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF YELLOW Optical fibre connection of BUj is wrong if the optical fibre
connection is right,
inform the factory or
agency to maintain it
Check the CT
secondary circuit of
corresponding bay
If bay n is out of service (the function link
Check whether bay n
[Bayn.Link_Out] is set as “1”), but current is
23 Bayn.Alm_Out GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF is in service but the
still detected (larger than 0.04In) in the
corresponding
corresponding bay
function link
[Bayn.Link_Out] is set
as “1”
Power supply of the opto-couplers of the Check the power

24 CU.Alm_OptoDC GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
central unit is abnormal circuit of the DC
25 BUj.Alm_OptoDC GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Power supply of the opto-couplers of BUj is module and binary

4 Supervision

abnormal. input module
No special treatment
is needed, and only
26 Alm_CommTest GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF The relay is in test mode.
wait for the completion
of testing.
Step1: check whether

the selected clock
synchronization mode
matches the clock
synchronization
source;
Step 2: check whether
the wiring connection
between the
equipment and the
27 Alm_TimeSyn GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Time synchronization abnormality alarm.
clock synchronization
source is correct;
Step 3: check whether
the setting for
selecting clock
synchronization (i.e.
[Opt_TimeSyn]) is set
correctly. If there is no
clock synchronization,
please set the setting

4 Supervision

[Opt_TimeSyn] as “No
TimeSyn”.
Please refer to other

28 Fail_Pkp OFF YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Device is blocked for over 10s. alarm signal to confirm
the blocking reason.
External binary input of blocking BBP Check the binary input

29 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1s. of blocking BBP.
Check CT secondary
Alarm signal indicating that differential
30 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF circuit includes CT
current FD element picks up for over 10s.
polarity.
31 AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF CT circuit failure, refer to Section 3.13.1.1
32 AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-A CT circuit failure
33 AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-B CT circuit failure
34 AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-C CT circuit failure
CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section

35 AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
3.13.1.2.
Check CT secondary
36 AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
circuit.
37 AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
38 AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
BCy CT circuit failure, refer to Section

39 @BCy.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
3.13.1.1.
40 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-A CT circuit failure
41 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-B CT circuit failure

4 Supervision

42 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-C CT circuit failure
BCy CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section

43 @BCy.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
3.13.1.2.
44 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality
45 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality
46 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality
BSz CT circuit failure, refer to Section

47 @BSz.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
3.13.1.1.
48 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-A CT circuit failure
49 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-B CT circuit failure
50 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-C CT circuit failure
BSz CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section

51 @BSz.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
3.13.1.2.
52 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality
53 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality
54 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality
Differential current high value alarm signal

55 @BBx.AlmH_Diff GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
of BBx, please refer to Section 3.13.1.3.
BBx phase-A differential current high value

56 @BBx.AlmH_Diff_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
alarm
BBx phase-B differential current high value

57 @BBx.AlmH_Diff_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
alarm
58 @BBx.AlmH_Diff_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF BBx phase-C differential current high value

4 Supervision

alarm
Differential current low value alarm signal

59 @BBx.AlmL_Diff GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
of BBx, please refer to Section 3.13.1.3.
BBx phase-A differential current low value

60 @BBx.AlmL_Diff_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
alarm
BBx phase-B differential current low value

61 @BBx.AlmL_Diff_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
alarm
BBx phase-C differential current low value

62 @BBx.AlmL_Diff_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
alarm
BBx VT circuit failure, refer to Section

63 @BBx.Alm_VTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
3.14.1. Check VT secondary
VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for circuit.
64 @BBx.Alm_VCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
over 3s.
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If

the logic setting [87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as
“1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be
Check whether BBP is
65 87B.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF disabled by the corresponding enabling
disabled.
binary input, function link or enabling logic
setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is
disabled will be issued.
Check whether binary

Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is
66 @Bayn.Alm_Cls GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF input of closing of bay
energized for over 10s.
n is always energized
67 @Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP FD Check whether the

4 Supervision

of bay n picks up for over 10s. measured current

equals to the actual
current.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for Check whether the

68 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF SOTF protection of BCy picks up for over setting
10s. [50SOTF.I_Set] is
reasonable and check
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for
whether the measured
69 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF SOTF protection of BSz picks up for over
current equals to the
10s.
actual current.
Alarm signal indicating that phase Check whether the

70 @Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF overcurrent FD element of bay n picks up corresponding current
for over 10s. setting is reasonable
and check whether the
Alarm signal indicating that ground
measured current
71 @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF overcurrent FD element of bay n picks up
equals to the actual
for over 10s.
current.
Alarm signal indicating that PD protection

Check the
FD element of bay n picks up for over 10s
corresponding pole
72 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay
disagreement binary
n [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for
input.
over 10s).
Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is Check the contact of

73 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
energized for over 10s. initiating BC BFP
74 @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF The common initiating contact of BFP of externally.

4 Supervision

BCy is continually energized for over 10s.
Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is

75 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Check the contact of
energized for over 10s.
initiating BS BFP
The common initiating contact of BFP of
76 @BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF externally.
BSz is continually energized for over 10s.
Check the contact of

initiating BC BFP
externally and check
77 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF whether the protective
BCy BFP picks up for over 10s.
element (which can
initiate BC BFP) drops
off.

initiating BS BFP
externally and check
78 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF whether the protective
BSz BFP picks up for over 10s.
element (which can
initiate BS BFP) drops
off.
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of

79 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Check the contact of
bay n is energized for over 10s.
initiating feeder BFP
The common initiating contact of BFP of
80 @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF externally.
bay n is continually energized for over 10s.
81 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF Binary input of releasing voltage controlled Check the contact of

4 Supervision

element of breaker failure protection is releasing voltage

energized for over 10s. controlled element of
breaker failure
protection.

initiating feeder BFP
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for externally and check
82 50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
BFP of bay n picks up for over 10s whether the protective
element (which can
initiate BFP) drops off.
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is

disabled. If the logic setting
[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once
feeder BFP is disabled (feeder BFP can be Check whether BFP is
83 50BF.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
disabled by the corresponding enabling disabled.
binary input, function link or enabling logic
setting), the alarm signal indicating feeder
BFP is disabled will be issued.
84 @Bayn.Alm_DS GREEN OFF OFF YELLOW OFF Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
Check auxiliary
BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector
contact of
85 Alm_IntLink GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF of the same feeder are closed at the same
disconnector.
time.
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n Check auxiliary

86 @Bayn.Alm_52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF breaker is energized but current can still be contact of circuit
detected in bay n. breaker of bay n.

4 Supervision

Normally closed and normally open

auxiliary contact of bay n breaker are
87 @Bayn.Alm_52a/52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF
energized or de-energized simultaneously
for over 5s.
Normally closed and normally open

Check auxiliary
auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of
88 @Bayn.Alm_89a/89b_@BBx GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF contact of
bay n is energized or de-energized
disconnector of bay n
simultaneously for over 5s.
If feeder breaker of bay n is open and

transfer bus disconnector of bay n is
closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under
Check the transfer bus
89 @Bayn.Alm_Byp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF OFF substituted status, then if the transfer bus
disconnector.
disconnector is open, substituted status
alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be
issued.

4 Supervision

Table of Contents
5 Measurement and Recording........................................................... 5-a
5.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ....................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ............................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 .......................................................... 5-2
5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ........................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5

Date: 2016-03-22

Date: 2016-03-22
5.1 General Description
PCS-915ID can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary input status,
event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid requirements.
5.2 Measurement
PCS-915ID can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The

measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software
interface on the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed as RMS values of the
secondary side of CT.
Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculated in each interval and the LCD
display will be updated in every 0.5 second.
Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu “Measurements”, or by
PCS-Explorer software or substation automatic system (SAS) software. By navigating the path
“Settings”->“Device Setup” ->“Comm Settings”, primary or secondary sampled values can be
selected to display by configuring the setting [Opt_Display_Status].
The central unit has two DSP modules that are protection DSP module (DSP module 1) and fault
detector DSP module (DSP module 2), the sampling values of both modules can be displayed on
LCD through different access menu.
NOTICE!
If the communication setting [Opt_Display_Status] is not configured, the sampled

values are displayed as secondary value by default. If the setting is set as “0”, the
sampled values are displayed as primary value; if this setting is set as “1”, the sampled
values are displayed as secondary value.
NOTICE!
The bay label of displayed sampled values will change according to the label settings of
each bay and busbar. In section 5.2, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bay.
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2
Item Rotation Description
Id_CZ A,B,C Three-phase check zone differential currents
@BBx.Id A,B,C Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx
@BBx.UP A,B,C Three phase voltages of BBx
@Bayn.IP A,B,C Three phase currents of bay n
@Bayn.IP_CT1 A,B,C Three phase currents of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

Date: 2016-03-22
@Bayn.IP_CT2 A,B,C Three phase currents of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Measured Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Measured Values
5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value,
the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference; if the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller
than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A
voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference; and so forth.
When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some feeder are larger than a
certain value, the phase A current of the feeder (takes the feeder whose number is minimal) will
be taken as a reference.
If the phase A voltage of BBx is taken as a reference, the displayed

value of“AngRef” is “x”, If phase A voltage of all busbars are all
smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “0”.
AngRef If the phase A current of feeder m is taken as a reference, the
displayed value of “AngRef” is “m” (m=01, 02, 03, ……), if all the
currents are smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of
“AngRef” is “0”.
@Bayn.Ang(IP) A,B,C The phase angle of current of bay n
@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT1) A,B,C The phase angle of current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT2) A,B,C The phase angle of current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@BBx.Ang(UP) A,B,C The phase angle of voltage of BBx
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Phase Angle
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Phase Angle
5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference.
f The system frequency
@BBx.U2x Negative sequence voltage of BBx
@BBx.3U0 Residual voltage of BBx
The half-cycle amplitude of three-phase check zone differential

Id_CZ_HalfCycle A,B,C
currents

Date: 2016-03-22
The half-cycle amplitude of three-phase discriminating zone

@BBx.Id_HalfCycle A,B,C
differential currents of BBx
Ir_CZ_HalfCycle A,B,C The half-cycle amplitude of three-phase check zone restraint currents
The half-cycle amplitude of three-phase discriminating zone restraint

@BBx.Ir_HalfCycle A,B,C
currents of BBx
@Bayn.I2 Negative sequence current of bay n
@Bayn.I2_CT1 Negative sequence current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.I2_CT2 Negative sequence current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.3I0 Residual current of bay n
@Bayn.3I0_CT1 Residual current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.3I0_CT2 Residual current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Cal Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Cal Values
5.3 Event & fault Records
5.3.1 Introduction
PCS-915 is capable of providing fault and disturbance recording, event recording and present
recording for the protected objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be
viewed on local LCD or by printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-Explorer
software and a waveform software.
5.3.2 Event Recording

The device can store up to 1024 abnormality alarm reports and 1024 binary input status changing
reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available
space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
 Abnormality alarm reports
Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection

alarm element will be logged as individual events.
 Binary input status changing reports
When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged
as binary input change report at the same time.
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording

5.3.3.1 Application
Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the

Date: 2016-03-22
power network and related primary and secondary device during and after a disturbance.
Analyzing on the recorded data can help to resolve practical problem.
5.3.3.2 Design
Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault
detector. The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory.
When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of
cases:
1) Only the fault detector element operates.
2) The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.
1. Trip record capacity and information
The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when
the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
A complete trip record includes the following items:
1) Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2) Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping
signal after fault detector picks up.
3) Faulty phase
The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report.
4) Operating time
It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault
detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included.
5) Protection element
The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element
operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault
detector element.
6) Tripping element
The tripped elements (feeder or bus coupler) are also shown.
2. Fault waveform record capacity and information

Date: 2016-03-22
MON module of the relay can store 32 pieces of fault waveform in non-volatile memory. Phase
current of each bay, check zone differential current, discriminative zone differential current and
buabar voltages (if voltage is used) will be recorded in waveform. If a new fault occurs when 32
fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes pre-disturbance waveform and post-disturbance waveform, the
pre-disturbance waveform recorded duration is configured via the communication setting
[RecDur_PreTrigDFR], the waveform recorded duration after the fault disappears is configured via
the communication setting [RecDur_PostFault], the maximum post-disturbance waveform
recorded duration is configured via the communication setting [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR].
5.3.4 Present Recording

Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating device which can be
triggered manually on LCD of device or remotely through PCS-Explorer software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.
Each time recording includes several-cycle waveform before triggering and several-cycle
waveform after triggering, the waveform recorded duration before triggering is configured via the
communication setting [RecDur_PreTrigDFR], the waveform recorded duration after triggering is
150ms+[RecDur_PostFault], but the waveform recorded duration after triggering must be less than
[MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR].

Date: 2016-03-22

Date: 2016-03-22
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware ............................................................................................ 6-a
6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 CT Requirement .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition of the Central Unit ............................... 6-5
6.3.1 PWR Module (NR1301) ....................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.2 MON Module (NR1101 or NR1102) ..................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1151A) ........................................................... 6-10
6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1151A) ..................................................... 6-10
6.3.5 EXT-DSP Module (NR1151A) .............................................................................................6-11
6.3.6 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.7 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-15
6.4 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition of Bay Unit ......................................... 6-16

6.4.1 PWR Module (NR1303E) .................................................................................................. 6-16
6.4.1 EXT-DSP module (NR1161C) ........................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.2 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401 or NR1409) ................................................................ 6-19
6.4.3 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.4 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-24
6.5 Optical connection ........................................................................................ 6-25

6.6 Default Hardware Terminal Definition.......................................................... 6-26
6.6.1 Optical Connection ............................................................................................................ 6-26
6.6.2 Binary Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.6.3 Binary Outputs ................................................................................................................... 6-29
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Typical front view of the central unit ................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6.1-2 Typical front view of bay unit................................................................................ 6-3

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of the central unit ..................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of bay unit ................................................................................. 6-3
Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301 .......................................................... 6-6
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module............................................................. 6-6
Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules .................................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface...................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules.................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6.3-6 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506A ............................................... 6-13
Figure 6.3-7 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS ............................................. 6-14
Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A .............................................................. 6-16
Figure 6.4-1 View of DC power supply module NR1303 ........................................................ 6-17
Figure 6.4-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-17
Figure 6.4-3 View of extended DSP plug-in module NR1161C ............................................. 6-19
Figure 6.4-4 Pin definition of NR1401...................................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6.4-5 Pin definition of NR1409-3I ................................................................................. 6-20
Figure 6.4-6 Pin definition of NR1409-6I ................................................................................. 6-21
Figure 6.4-7 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ....................................... 6-21
Figure 6.4-8 Current connection of AI module ....................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6.4-9 Voltage connection of AI module ....................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6.4-10 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504A ............................................. 6-23
Figure 6.4-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A ............................................................. 6-25
Figure 6.4-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A ............................................................ 6-25
List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 Module configuration of central unit ..................................................................... 6-1
Table 6.1-2 Module configuration of bay unit ........................................................................... 6-1
Table 6.3-1 Description of the LED indicators of NR1151A module..................................... 6-11
Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506A ................................................. 6-13
Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS............................................... 6-14
Table 6.4-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504A ................................................. 6-24

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Table 6.6-1 Pin definition of BI module located in slot No.14 of the central unit (NR1506AS)
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-27
Table 6.6-2 Pin definition of BI module located in slot No.05 of non-BC/BS bay unit
(NR1504A) ........................................................................................................................... 6-27
Table 6.6-3 Pin definition of BI module located in slot No.05 of BC/BS bay unit (NR1504A)
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-28
Table 6.6-4 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.15 of the central unit (NR1521B)
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-29
Table 6.6-5 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.06 of BU1~31 (NR1521A) ...... 6-29
Table 6.6-6 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.07 of BU1~31 (NR1549A) ...... 6-30
Table 6.6-7 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.06 of BU32 (NR1521A) ........... 6-30
Table 6.6-8 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.07 of BU32 (NR1549A) ........... 6-30

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
PCS-915 adopts 32-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management. The
protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System
parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in
each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection device.
PCS-915 captures current and voltage signals and converts them to small signals. These small
signals will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to
protection calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module
2). When MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 32-bit
CPU on MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and
MON module can provide sequence of event (SOE) record, waveform recording, printing,
communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication
between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar
to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation
module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched
on.
Table 6.1-1 Module configuration of central unit
No. ID Module Description
1 NR1101/NR1102 Management module (MON module)
2 NR1151 Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)
3 NR1151 Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)
4 NR1151 Extended DSP module (EXT-DSP Module)
5 NR1506 Binary input module (BI module)
6 NR1521 Binary output module (BO module)
7 NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module)
8 Human machine interface module (HMI module)
Table 6.1-2 Module configuration of bay unit
No. ID Module Description
1 NR1161 Extended DSP module (EXT-DSP Module)
2 NR1401/NR1409 Analog input module ( AI module )
3 NR1504 Binary input module (BI module)
4 NR1521/NR1549 Binary output module (BO module)
5 NR1303 Power supply module (PWR module)
6 Human machine interface module (HMI module)
 MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management,
and etc.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
 DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.
 AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers
and voltage transformers respectively.
 BI module provides binary inputs that are inputted via 110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler
(configurable).
 BO module provides all kinds of binary output contacts, including signal output contacts and
tripping output contacts.
 PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for

various modules of the device
 EXT-DSP module
For the central unit, it receives the sampling values of analog and binary signals from each
bay unit and transmits synchronous and tripping signals to each bay unit
For each bay unit, it accomplish the sampling of analog and binary signals of local bay, and
implement tripping function for local bay when receiving command from central unit
 HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and multiplex RJ45 ports for user as
human-machine interface
Following figure shows typical front view of the central unit (4U size).
1
HEALTHY
11 PCS-915
2 12
MISC ALM BUSBAR RELAY
3 13
4 14
P
GR
5 15
6 16 ENT
C
ES
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Figure 6.1-1 Typical front view of the central unit
Following figure shows typical front view of bay unit (semi-layer 4U size).

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
PCS-915
1
HEALTHY
2
BUSBAR RELAY
ALARM
3
TRIP
4
10
Figure 6.1-2 Typical front view of bay unit
Following figure shows typical rear view of the central unit.
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
NR1102M NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1151A NR1506AS NR1521B NR1301T
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Ethernet 5V BJ
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 BJJ BSJ
TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1 TX1
Ethernet
1 BO_COM1
TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 TX4 2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 RX1 5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 RX2 7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 RX3 10 PWR+
11 PWR-
RX4 RX4 RX4 RX4 RX4 RX4 RX4 RX4 RX4 12 GND
RX4
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of the central unit
Following figure shows typical rear view of bay unit.
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NR1161C NR1409 NR1504A NR1521A NR1549A NR1303E

5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
TX ON
RX OFF
RX
DANGER
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of bay unit

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
6.2 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl′
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Rated resistance burden (ohms)
Rbn
Rbn=Sbn/Isn2
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl′
Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Ipcf
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Real resistance burden (ohms)

Rb
Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc
Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)
RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
For example:
1. Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)
= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V
2. Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl′
6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition of the Central Unit
The central unit consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, EXT-DSP module,
binary input module and binary output module.
The definition and application of each module and its terminals are introduced as follows.
6.3.1 PWR Module (NR1301)

The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of
“Technical Data”. The standard output voltages are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the
output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device. The +24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this
device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the
connector is described as below.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
NR1301
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
ON
OFF
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301
For some occasions, the power switch in the dotted box of above figure is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module
Pin No. Symbol Description
01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1.
02 BO_Fail_1 Equipment failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Equipment abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
07 OPTO+ Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the binary input
module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-, the rated output
08 OPTO-
current of this power supply is 200mA.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
09 Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device
12 GND Grounded connection of this device
NOTICE!
The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. Power

supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially
ordered. It is important to CHECK if the rated voltage of power supply module is the
same as the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into
service.
NOTICE!
The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of
device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
NOTICE!
Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding MUST be ensured before the device is put into operation.
6.3.2 MON Module (NR1101 or NR1102)
CAUTION!
Do NOT look into the end of an optical fiber connected to an optical port.
Do NOT look into an optical port/connector.
A direct sight to laser light may cause temporary or permanent blindness.
The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its can provide management of the complete device,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.
The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
NR1102M NR1102N NR1101F
ETHERNET
TX
ETHERNET
RX
TX
RX
ETHERNET
Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules
Module ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
03 SGND synchronization
NR1102M 256M DDR Twisted pair wire
04
05 RTS
RS-232 06 TXD To printer
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102N 256M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04 Twisted pair wire
05 RTS
07 SGND
3 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 A To SCADA
NR1101F 256M DDR 02 B Twisted pair wire
RS-485
03 SGND
04

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Module ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

05 A
06 B
RS-485 To SCADA
07 SGND
08
09 SYN+
10 SYN- To clock
RS-485
11 SGND synchronization
12
13 RTS
15 SGND
16
The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs is used to connect the “+”
and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other is used to connect the signal ground of the
interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices to a bus through the twisted pair.
The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports; the free terminal does not
need to be connected.
Twisted pair wire

A 01
B 02
COM
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

SYN+ 01
CLOCK SYN
SYN- 02
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

RTS 05
PRINT
TXD 06
SGND 07
Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Pin1
Pin2
Pin3
Figure 6.3-5 Jumpers of clock synchronization port
NOTICE!
As shown in Figure 6.3-5, the external receiving mode of IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface can be set by the jumper J8&J9.
Jumper RS-485 TTL

J8 Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected. (RS-485+) Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected. (TTL+)
J9 Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected. (RS-485-) Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected. (TTL-)
6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1151A)

The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and
tripping output etc.
6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1151A)

The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements
and providing positive power supply to output relay.
Four pairs of optical fiber receiving and sending interfaces are quipped for each NR1151A module,
and the first pair of optical fiber receiving and sending interfaces of the DSP module located in slot
No.2 are used to connect with voltage bay unit.
DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration. The following figure
shows rear views and terminal definitions for different type of DSP modules; the corresponding
module shall be adopted in accordance with concrete situation.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
NR1151A
1 2 3
4 5 6
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules
6.3.5 EXT-DSP Module (NR1151A)
CAUTION!
The central unit is equipped with several optical fiber interface DSP modules (NR1151A) which
can receive the sampling values of analog and binary signals from each bay unit and transmit
synchronous and tripping signals to each bay unit.
Four pairs of optical fiber receiving and sending interfaces are quipped for each NR1151A module,
so up to four bay units can be connected to one NR1151A module.
There are 6 LED indicators on NR1151A module. The LED indicators of the NR1151A module are
described in the following table.
Table 6.3-1 Description of the LED indicators of NR1151A module
LED No. Display Description Remarks

No valid data is received via the
Off
first fiber optical port The RX LED indicator of the first fiber
1
This device is receiving data via optical port (RX1)
Green
the first fiber optical port
No valid data is received via the The RX LED indicator of the second fiber
2 Off
second fiber optical port optical port (RX2)

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
LED No. Display Description Remarks

This device is receiving data via
Green
the second fiber optical port
Off
third fiber optical port The RX LED indicator of the third fiber
3
Green
the third fiber optical port
Off
fourth fiber optical port The RX LED indicator of the fourth fiber
4
Green
the fourth fiber optical port
5 Reserved
Off The module is abnormal The LED indicator of the optical interface
6
Flash as Green The module is work normally module
6.3.6 Binary Input (BI) Module

NR1506A and NR1506AS modules are two types of standard BI modules that used in the central
unit. All the binary inputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user
requirement, please refer to Chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
 NR1506A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1506A and 20 configurable high voltage binary inputs
are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V and
the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Opto+ 01
BI_01 02
NR1506A
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
01
BI_04 05
02
03 BI_05 06
04
BI_06 07
05
06 BI_07 08
07
08 BI_08 09
09
BI_09 10
10
11 BI_10 11
12
BI_11 12
13
14 BI_12 13
15
BI_13 14
16
17 BI_14 15
18
19 BI_15 16
20 BI_16 17
21
22 BI_17 18
BI_18 19
BI_19 20
BI_20 21
COM- 22
Figure 6.3-6 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506A
Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506A

01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply of the module
02 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware

22 COM- Common terminal of negative pole of power supply of the module
 NR1506AS
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1506AS and 20 configurable high voltage binary
inputs are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and
250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.
An internal binary input [BI_COMMON] is equipped for NR1506AS type BI module, [BI_COMMON]
will be energized if any of [BI_01]~[BI_20] is energized.
Opto+ 01
BI_01 02
NR1506AS
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
01
BI_04 05
02
03 BI_05 06
04
BI_06 07
05
06 BI_07 08
07
08 BI_08 09
09
BI_09 10
10
11 BI_10 11
12
BI_11 12
13
14 BI_12 13
15
BI_13 14
16
17 BI_14 15
18
19 BI_15 16
20 BI_16 17
21
22 BI_17 18
BI_18 19
BI_19 20
BI_20 21
COM- 22
BI_COMMON
Figure 6.3-7 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS
Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS


Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware

6.3.7 Binary Output (BO) Module

NR1521A, NR1521B, NR1521C are three types of standard BO modules. All the binary outputs
can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please refer to
chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping or operating
signals BO, and the BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for alarm signal and other
signal BO.
 NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C
NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
controlled by the fault detector.
NR1521B can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, the first 9 BO contacts will be
controlled by fault detector and the last two BO contacts will not.
NR1521C can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact is not
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C. The pin definition of
the connectors are described as below.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
01
BO_01
NR1521A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22
Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A
Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C are similar to that of NR1521A.
6.4 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition of Bay Unit
Each bay unit consists of power supply module, EXT-DSP module, binary input module and binary
output module. The definition and application of each module and its terminals are introduced as
follows.
6.4.1 PWR Module (NR1303E)

The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of
“Technical Data”. The standard output voltage is +5V DC. The +5V DC output provides power
supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device. The tolerances
of the output voltages are continuously monitored.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the
connector is described as below.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
NR1303E
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
ON
OFF
Figure 6.4-1 View of DC power supply module NR1303
For some occasions, the power switch in the dotted box of above figure is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
Figure 6.4-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module
04 Not used
05 Not used
06 Not used
07 Not used
08 Not used
09 Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device
12 GND Grounded connection of this device

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
NOTICE!
The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. Power

supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially
ordered. It is important to check if the rated voltage of power supply module is the same
as the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into service.
NOTICE!
The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of
device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
NOTICE!
Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding MUST be ensured before the device is put into operation.
6.4.1 EXT-DSP module (NR1161C)
CAUTION!
Each bay unit is equipped with one extended DSP module (NR1161C) which can accomplish the
sampling of analog and binary signals of local bay, and implement tripping function for local bay
when receiving command from central unit.
Three optical interfaces are equipped with NR1161C module, only the upper two optical interfaces
are useful.
There is one green LED indicator on NR1161C module, the indicator will flash in application
initialization process and extinguish if application initialization process is finished.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
NR1161C
TX
RX
RX
Figure 6.4-3 View of extended DSP plug-in module NR1161C
6.4.2 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401 or NR1409)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT, the module is
not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
Each AI module can provide up to 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on
the front of this module. Maximum linear range of the current converter is 40In.
Three kinds of AI modules NR1401, NR1409-3I (3I for 1A, 3I for 5A, for single-CT bay) and
NR1409-6I (6I for 1A, 6I for 5A, for double-CT BC/BS bay) can be used for bay unit. NR1401 is
used for voltage bay unit and NR1409 is used for current bay unit.
For NR1401, up to 12-channel voltage can be connected. For NR1409, the 1A and 5A current
channels are all equipped.
The pin definition of the connector is described as below.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Ua_BB1 01 Uan_BB1 02
NR1401
Ub_BB1 03 Ubn_BB1 04
Uc_BB1 05 Ucn_BB1 06
Figure 6.4-4 Pin definition of NR1401
Ia_Bayn 01 Ian_Bayn 02 1A
NR1409
Ia_Bayn 03 Ibn_Bayn 04 5A
Ib_Bayn 05 Ibn_Bayn 06 1A
Ib_Bayn 07 Ibn_Bayn 08 5A
Ic_Bayn 09 Icn_Bayn 10 1A
Ic_Bayn 11 Icn_Bayn 12 5A
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 6.4-5 Pin definition of NR1409-3I

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Ia_Bayn_CT1 01 Ian_Bayn_CT1 02 1A
NR1409
Ia_Bayn_CT1 03 Ibn_Bayn_CT1 04 5A
Ib_Bayn_CT1 05 Ibn_Bayn_CT1 06 1A
Ic_Bayn_CT1 09 Icn_Bayn_CT1 10 1A
Figure 6.4-6 Pin definition of NR1409-6I
For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.
Plug
Socket
In
Out
plug is not put in the socket
In
Out
Put the plug in the socket
Figure 6.4-7 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
P2 S2
P1 S1
02 01
04 03
06 05
Figure 6.4-8 Current connection of AI module
13 14
15 16
17 18
Figure 6.4-9 Voltage connection of AI module
6.4.3 Binary Input (BI) Module

NR1504A is the standard BI module that used in bay unit. All the binary inputs can be configured
by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please refer to Chapter 9 about the
concrete operation method.
 NR1504A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1504A and 18 configurable high voltage binary inputs
are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V and
the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Opto+ 01
BI_01 02
NR1504A
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
01
BI_04 05
02
03 BI_05 06
04
BI_06 07
05
06 08
07
08 BI_07 09
09
BI_08 10
10
11 BI_09 11
12
BI_10 12
13
14 BI_11 13
15
BI_12 14
16
17 15
BI_COMMON1
18
19 BI_13 16
20 BI_14 17
21
22 BI_15 18
BI_16 19
BI_17 20
BI_18 21
COM- 22
BI_COMMON2
Figure 6.4-10 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504A
Two internal binary inputs [BI_COMMON1] and [BI_COMMON2] are equipped for NR1504A type
BI module. As shown in above figure, [BI_COMMON1] will be energized if any of [BI_09]~[BI_12]
is energized and [BI_COMMON2] will be energized if any of [BI_15]~[BI_18] is energized.
When users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by themselves,
breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary inputs ([@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI]) can only be configured to [BI_09]~[BI_12] (or
[BI_15]~[BI_18]), and the common BFI binary input of bay n ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]) must be
configured to [BI_COMMON1] (or [BI_COMMON2]).
If any BFI binary input is configured to any terminal of [BI_09]~[BI_12], binary input for other
functions can not be configured for the rest terminals of [BI_09]~[BI_12], and the corresponding
common BFI binary input must be configured to [BI_COMMON1].
If any BFI binary input is configured to any terminal of [BI_15]~[BI_18], binary input for other
functions can not be configured for the rest terminals of [BI_15]~[BI_18], and the corresponding
common BFI binary input must be configured to [BI_COMMON2].

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Table 6.4-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504A

08 Blank Blank
15 Blank Blank
6.4.4 Binary Output (BO) Module

NR1521A and NR1549A are two types of standard BO modules that used in bay unit. All the binary
outputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please refer
to chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping or operating
signals BO, and the BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for alarm signal and other
signal BO.
 NR1521A
NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C. The pin definition of
the connectors are described as below.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
01
BO_01
NR1521A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22
 NR1549A
NR1549A can provide 11 output contacts and all the contacts are magnetic latched normally open
(NO) contacts and will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
01
BO_01
NR1549A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22
6.5 Optical connection
Optical connection is as follows:

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
1) TX of optical interface DSP module of bay unit → RX of optical interface module of central unit
2) RX of optical interface DSP module of bay unit → TX of optical interface module of central unit
Each communication message is checked by CRC to enhance the reliability.
If a bay unit (BUj) is out of service, set the corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Out] as “1”,
the current of the corresponding bay will be excluded for differential protection calculation. If
current is still detected (larger than 0.04In) in the corresponding bay, an alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Out] will be issued and the current will be included for differential protection
calculation.
6.6 Default Hardware Terminal Definition
The hardware terminal definition introduced in this section is the default maximized pin definition,
for a specific project, according to the specific busbar arrangement and the selected software
version, some binary inputs or outputs are not configured, or the default pin definition is changed
according to users’ requirement.
6.6.1 Optical Connection

TX and RX (the upper two optical interfaces) of optical interface DSP module (NR1161C) of BU33
(voltage bay unit) should be connected to RX1 and TX1 of optical interface DSP module
(NR1151A) of the central unit that located in slot No.2.
TX and RX of NR1161C of BU1~4 (current bay unit) should be connected to RX1~4 and TX1~4 of
NR1151A of the central unit that located in slot No.5.
TX and RX of NR1161C of BU5~8 (current bay units) should be connected to RX1~4 and TX1~4
of NR1151A of the central unit that located in slot No.6.
TX and RX of NR1161C of BU9~12 (current bay units) should be connected to RX1~4 and TX1~4
of NR1151A of the central unit that located in slot No.7.
TX and RX of NR1161C of BU13~16 (current bay units) should be connected to RX1~4 and
TX1~4 of NR1151A of the central unit that located in slot No.8.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
6.6.2 Binary Inputs

6.6.2.1 Binary Inputs of the Central Unit
Table 6.6-1 Pin definition of BI module located in slot No.14 of the central unit (NR1506AS)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply of the BI module
02 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse
03 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
04 BI_Maintenance Binary input indicating that the equipment is in maintenance state
05 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
06 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input
07 BI_TrigDFR Trigger waveform recording binary input
08 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling busbar differential protection
09 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder breaker failure protection
10 50/51.BI_En Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection
11 62PD.BI_En Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection
12 50SOTF.BI_En Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
Binary input indicating that two busbars (BB1 and BB2) are under
13 BI_En_IntLink1 the inter-connected operation mode, if it is not configured, its default
value is “0”
value is “0”
value is “0”
16 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
17 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking busbar differential protection
18 Reserved Reserved
6.6.2.2 Binary Inputs of Bay Units
Table 6.6-2 Pin definition of BI module located in slot No.05 of non-BC/BS bay unit (NR1504A)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply for high voltage opto-couplers
02 @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1 Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
03 @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1 Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
08 blank blank
11 @Bayn.BI_A_BFI Phase-A breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
12 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
13 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
14 @Bayn.BI_BFI Three-phase breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
15 blank blank
Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement
19 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD
status
@Bayn.50BF.BI_RlsVC Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker
20
E failure protection of bay n
Table 6.6-3 Pin definition of BI module located in slot No.05 of BC/BS bay unit (NR1504A)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply for high voltage opto-couplers
08 blank blank
15 blank blank

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement
19 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD
status
6.6.3 Binary Outputs

6.6.3.1 Binary Outputs of the Central Unit
Table 6.6-4 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.15 of the central unit (NR1521B)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01~02 BO_Op1_BBP BBP operates (first)
03~04 BO_Op2_BBP BBP operates (second)
05~06 BO_Op1_BFP BFP operates (first)
07~08 BO_Op2_BFP BFP operates (second)
09~10 BO_Op1_MISC BC protection or other protection (BC will be tripped) operates (first)
11~12 BO_Op2_MISC BC protection or other protection (BC will be tripped) operates (second)
13~14 Reserved Reserved
19~20 BO_VT/CT_Alm VT/CT circuit failure alarm
21~22 BO_DS_Alm Disconnector position alarm
6.6.3.2 Binary Outputs of Bay Units
Table 6.6-5 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.06 of BU1~31 (NR1521A)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01~02 BO_Trip1_Bayn Tripping contact of bay n (first)
03~04 BO_Trip2_Bayn Tripping contact of bay n (second)
Inter-tripping breakers of other side(s) of bay n if circuit breaker of bay
05~06 BO_IntTrp_BFP_Bayn
n fails

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
Table 6.6-6 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.07 of BU1~31 (NR1549A)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01~02 BO_Trip3_Bayn Tripping contact of bay n (third)
03~04 BO_Trip4_Bayn Tripping contact of bay n (fourth)
Table 6.6-7 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.06 of BU32 (NR1521A)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01~02 BO_Trip1_Bay32 Tripping contact of bay 32 (first)
03~04 BO_Trip2_Bay32 Tripping contact of bay 32 (second)
Table 6.6-8 Pin definition of BO module located in slot No.07 of BU32 (NR1549A)
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.
01~02 BO_Trip3_Bay32 Tripping contact of bay 32 (third)
03~04 BO_Trip4_Bay32 Tripping contact of bay 32 (fourth)

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware
Terminal
Symbol Description
No.

Date: 2015-11-24
6 Hardware

Date: 2015-11-24
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings .............................................................................................. 7-a
7.1 Settings of the Central Unit ............................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Device Settings .................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Communication Settings ...................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Label Settings ...................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.4 Function Links ...................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.5 System Settings ..................................................................................................................7-11
7.2 Settings of Bay Unit ...................................................................................... 7-12

7.2.1 Device Settings .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.2.2 System Settings ................................................................................................................. 7-13

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
7.1 Settings of the Central Unit
Settings of the central unit are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings.
Each protection element has its independent setting menu which are given detailed description in
chapter “Operation Theory”. In this chapter only common settings are introduced. Common
settings consist of device settings, communication settings, label settings, system settings,
function links and etc.
The central unit has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power
system operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common
settings are shared by all protection setting groups.
If all the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value (the communication setting
[Opt_Display_Settings] is set as “1” or the setting is not configured), all the current settings are
converted from primary current according to referenced CT ratio instead of the actual CT ratio of
each bay.
7.1.1 Device Settings

 Setting list
No. Item Description Setting Range

0:24V, 1:48V
Voltage level of binary input for the module that
1 Bx.Un_BinaryInput 2:110V, 3:220V, 4: 30V,
located in slot No.x
5: 125V
0: Current Language
2 Opt_Caption_103 The language of group caption of IEC103 protocol 1: Fixed Chinese
2: Fixed English
Using moveable disk to realize the backup and
0: Disable
3 En_MDisk recovery of program and configuration.
1:Enable
Default value is 0, and the function is reserved.
 Setting description
1. [Bx.Un_BinaryInput]
The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
For low-voltage BI modules, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.
0: 24V
1: 48V
2: 110V
3: 220V
4: 30V
5: 125V

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
2. [Opt_Caption_103]
0: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in current language
1: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in Chinese
2: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in English
It is recommended to be set as “1” if the device communicate with SCADA in Chinese.
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings
7.1.2 Communication Settings

 Setting list
No. Setting Item Range Description
1 IEDNAME The IED name defined in 61850 protocol
2 IP_LAN1 IP address of Ethernet port A
3 Mask_LAN1 Subnet mask of Ethernet port A
4 En_LAN1 0,1 Put Ethernet port A into service
5 IP_LAN2 IP address of Ethernet port B
6 Mask_LAN2 Subnet mask of Ethernet port B
7 En_LAN2 0,1 Put Ethernet port B into service
8 IP_LAN3 IP address of Ethernet port C
9 Mask_LAN3 Subnet mask of Ethernet port C
10 En_LAN3 0,1 Put Ethernet port C into service
11 IP_LAN4 IP address of Ethernet port D
12 Mask_LAN4 Subnet mask of Ethernet port D
13 En_LAN4 0,1 Put Ethernet port D into service
000.000.000.000~
14 Gateway Gateway of router
255.255.255.255
Enable/disable sending message in broadcast

15 En_Broadcast 0: disable, 1: enable
mode via network. (IEC103).
Time scale format of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

16 Fmt_Net_103 0, 1
(for Ethernet port).
Communication address between the protective

17 Addr_RS485A 0~255 device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial
port 1.
4800,9600,19200,
18 Baud_RS485A 38400,57600,115200 Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1.
bps

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port

19 Protocol_RS485A 0~2
1.
Spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN

20 Inf_RS485A_103 0, 1 and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for
RS-485 serial port 1).

21 Fmt_RS485A_103 0, 1
(for RS-485 serial port 1).
Communication address between the protective

22 Addr_RS485B 0~255 device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial
port 2.
4800,9600,19200,
23 Baud_RS485B 38400,57600,115200 Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 2.
bps
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port

24 Protocol_RS485B 0~2
2.
Spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN

25 Inf_RS485B_103 0, 1 and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for
RS-485 serial port 2).

26 Fmt_RS485B_103 0, 1
(for RS-485 serial port 2).
Threshold value of sending measurement values

27 Threshold_Measmt_Net 0~100% to SCADA through IEC103 or IEC61850 protocol.
Default value: “1%”.
The time period when the equipment sends

measurement data to SCADA through IEC103
28 Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535s
protocol.
Default value:”60”.
Select the format of measurement data sent to

29 Format_Measmt 0, 1
SCADA through IEC103 protocol.
4800,9600,
30 Baud_Printer 19200,38400, 51600, Baud rate of printer port
115200 bps
0: disable
31 En_AutoPrint Enable/disable automatic printing function
1: enable
Conventional
SAS Select the mode of time synchronization of
32 Opt_TimeSyn
Advanced equipment.
NoTimeSyn
000.000.000.000~ The address of the external SNTP clock

33 IP_Server_SNTP
255.255.255.255 synchronization server sending SNTP message to

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
the equipment.
The local time zone also refered to as the hour

34 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12hrs
offset hour from UTC .
35 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60min The offset minute of local time from UTC.
Primary value/ Measurement values are displayed in primary

36 Opt_Display_Status
Secondary value value or secondary value
Waveform recorded duration before the trigger

37 RecDur_PreTrigDFR 0.000~1.000s
element operating
Waveform recorded duration after the fault

38 RecDur_PostFault 0.000~10.000s
happens
The maximum waveform recorded duration after

39 MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR 0.000~10.000s
the trigger element operating
Primary value/ Select display primary value or secondary value

40 Opt_Display_Settings
Secondary value for protection settings
Following communication settings are configured only when DNP3.0 protocol is adopted
x=1, 2, 3 and 4
41 En_TCPx_DNP 0~1 The logic setting of the No.x network DNP client
42 Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP 0 ~ 65519 The slave address of the No.x network DNP client
The master address of the No.x network DNP

43 Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP 0 ~ 65519
client
000.000.000.000
44 IP_Master_TCPx_DNP The IP address of the No.x network DNP client
~255.255.255.255
The communication map of the No.x network DNP

45 Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP 0~4
client
The “OBJ1” default variation of the No.x network

46 Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~1
DNP client

DNP client

DNP client

DNP client

DNP client
The timeout of application layer of the No.x

51 t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP 1 ~ 5s
network DNP client
The heartbeat time interval of the No.x network

52 t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP 0 ~ 7200s
DNP client

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
The logic setting of the unsolicited message

53 En_UR_TCPx_DNP 0~1
function of the No.x network DNP client
The online retransmission number of the

54 Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP 2 ~ 10 unsolicited message of the No.x network DNP
client
The offline timeout of the unsolicited message of

55 t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP 1 ~ 5000s
the No.x network DNP client
The class level of the “Binary Input” of the No.x

56 Class_BI_TCPx_DNP 0~3
network DNP client
The class level of the “Analog Input” of the No.x

57 Class_AI_TCPx_DNP 0~3
network DNP client
The selection timeout of the No.x network DNP

58 t_Select_TCPx_DNP 0 ~ 240s
client
The time interval of the time synchronization

59 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP 0 ~ 3600s
function of the No.x network DNP client
1. [En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)
These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP

address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.
“1”: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to
be set.
“0”: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed
to be set.
2. [En_Broadcast]
This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting
must be set as “1”.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;
1: the device sends UDP messages through network.
3. [Fmt_Net_103]
If the setting is set as”0”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e.
4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as”1”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e.
7-byte time scale format.

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
4. [Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)
The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port x.
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Modbus protocol
2: DNP protocol
5. [Inf_RS485A_103], [Inf_RS485B_103]
When spontaneous events are sent via generic services based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this
setting should be setting as “0”. When spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN and INF
based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be set as “1”.
6. [Fmt_RS485A_103], [Fmt_RS485B_103]
The setting is invalid if the setting [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as”1”.
If the setting is set as”0” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as”1” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format.
7. [Format_Measmt]
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard.
8. [En_AutoPrint]
If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be
set as “1”.
9. [Opt_TimeSyn]
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time
clock synchronization signals shown in following table.
Item Description
PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
Conventional
PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SAS
SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
Item Description
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.
Advanced IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
PPS(Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select
NoTimeSyn
this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by device, but “Advanced” mode
is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be
issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP module，“SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without
NOTICE!
The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.
10. [IP_Server_SNTP]
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.
11. [Opt_Display_Status]
If this setting is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default.
If this setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are displayed as primary value, if this setting is set
as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of referenced CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref),
if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of referenced CT.
12. [Opt_Display_Settings]
If this setting is not configured, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value
by default. If this setting is set as “0”, the protection settings are set and displayed as primary
value, if this setting is set as “1”, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of referenced CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref]),
if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of referenced CT.
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings
7.1.3 Label Settings

 Setting list
No. Symbol Description
1 Name_Busx Label setting of busbar No.x
2 Name_Bayn Label setting of bay n
These settings are used to definite the label of each bay and busbar. They can be set by 6
characters at most. The label of each bay and busbar will influence the displayed contents of all
reports, settings and metering that related with each bay and busbar.
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupLabel Settings
7.1.4 Function Links

Function link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function
links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link
[Link_RmtCtrlLink]).
Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in
service. If the virtual binary input [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as “1”, through SAS or RTU, the
function link can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in
service or out of service through remote command.
These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out
of service remotely away from an unattended substation.
 Setting list
No. Symbol Remark
Enable remote setting modification. Set it as “0” if only local setting

modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote setting
1 Link_RmtChgSetting
modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark
Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as “0” if only

local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local
2 Link_RmtChgGrp
and remote active setting group modification are both needed.
Enable remote function links modification. Set it as “0” if only local

function links modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote
3 Link_RmtCtrlLink
function links modification are both needed.
Enable all protective functions. All the protective functions can be

enabled only when it is set as “1”. If it is set as “0”, all the protective
4 Link_Prot
functions is disabled.

5 87B.Link
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection

6 50BF.Link
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance,

7 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance
1: Bay n is out of service (the optical fiber of the corresponding bay

8 @Bayn.Link_Out unit is disabled).
0: Bay n is put into service.
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

input and function link of a protective element is configured according
9 Fdr.50DZ.Link
to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it
10 @Bayn.50DZ.Link
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured

function link of a protective element is configured according to each
11 50SOTF.Link
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS

12 @Bayn.50SOTF.Link
bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark

configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground

overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective
element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer
13 50/51.Link to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

14 @Bayn.50/51P.Link
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

15 @Bayn.50/51G.Link
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic

16 62PD.Link
Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when

the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set
17 @Bayn.62PD.Link
as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

18 Link_IntLinkx
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
19 Link_Out_Volt_BB 1: the data of voltage bay unit are not received by the central unit, all

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark
the sampled values of voltage bay unit will be written as “0”

0: the data of voltage bay unit are received by the central unit.
1. [Link_Out_Volt_BB]
It should be set as “0” if voltage is used. If busbar voltage is not connected to PCS-915ID, the
setting should be set as “1”, otherwise some abnormality alarm signals will be issued.
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
7.1.5 System Settings

 Setting list
No. Item Setting Range Default Setting
1 Active_Grp 1~10 1
2 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters
3 fn 50Hz, 60Hz 50Hz
4 U1n_PP 1~1200kV 220kV
5 U2n_PP 1.00~200V 100V
6 Bayn.I1n -9999~9999A 1200A
7 Bayn.I1n_CT1 -9999~9999A 1200A
8 Bayn.I1n_CT2 -9999~9999A 1200A
9 I1n_Ref 1~9999A 1200A
10 I2n_Ref 1A or 5A 1A
11 Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode 0, 1 0
NOTICE!
During selecting the CT, please ENSURE the primary system short-circuit capacity of
each single bay shall not exceed 30In. In order to ensure the accuracy, the difference of
CT ratio of each connected bay shall not too larger. The system total short-circuit
capacity that converted to the referenced CT secondary side shall not exceed 80In.
1. [Active_Grp]
The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time.
2. [PrimaryEquip_Name]
Name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, etc.
3. [U1n_PP]

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.
4. [U2n_PP]
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.
5. [Bayn.I1n]
Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not
used. If the CT polarity mark of the bay is opposite to the default polarity mark, this setting can be
set as a negative value.
6. [Bayn.I1n_CT1], [Bayn.I1n_CT2]
If there are two CTs available for bay n (such as a bus coupler with double CTs available),
[Bayn.I1n_CT1] and [Bayn.I1n_CT2] are the rated primary current of the two CTs of bay n. They
should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not used. If the CT polarity mark is opposite to the
default polarity mark, this setting can be set as a negative value.
7. [I1n_Ref]
Rated primary current of referenced CT.
This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar
are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the referenced CT.
If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure accuracy,
the rated primary current of referenced CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary current.
For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar. The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder
02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as “600”.
8. [I2n_Ref]
The rated secondary current of referenced CT. This setting is used in case that the rated
secondary current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT
with the most applied ratio is taken as the referenced CT.
9. [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
When PCS-915ID is applied to an unearthed system, it should be set as “1”. It will affect the
settings of voltage controlled element, please refer to Section 3.12.6 and Section 3.5.6, the
criterion of VT circuit supervision will also change, please refer to Section 3.14.
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings
7.2 Settings of Bay Unit
All the settings of each bay unit can be check and modify via the virtual LCD using the software
PCS-PC, please refer to Section 8.5 for details. Feeder overcurrent protection and feeder pole
disagreement protection related settings have been introduced in Section 3.9.6 and Section

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
3.10.6.
7.2.1 Device Settings

 Setting list
No. Item Description Setting Range

0:24V, 1:48V
Voltage level of binary input for the module that
1 B05.Un_BinaryInput 2:110V, 3:220V, 4: 30V,
located in slot No.05
5: 125V
1. [B05.Un_BinaryInput]
The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
For low-voltage BI modules, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice_Settings
7.2.2 System Settings

 Setting list
No. Item Setting Range Default Setting
1 I1n -9999~9999A 1200A
2 I1n_Ref 1~9999A 1200A
3 I2n_Ref 1A or 5A 1A
4 fn 50Hz, 60Hz 50Hz
1. [I1n]
Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not
used. It should be set the same as the setting [Bayn.I1n] of the central unit. If the CT polarity mark
of the bay is opposite to the default polarity mark, this setting can be set as a negative value.
2. [I1n_Ref]
Rated primary current of referenced CT. It should be set the same as the same setting of the
central unit.
3. [I2n_Ref]
The rated secondary current of referenced CT. It should be set the same as the same setting of the
central unit.
4. [fn]

Date: 2016-03-22
7 Settings
The system frequency. It should be set the same as the same setting of the central unit.
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsSystem_Settings

Date: 2016-03-22
Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface.................................................................. 8-a
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview ...................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Functionality.....................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys.............................................................................................................8-1
8.1.3 LED Indications................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.4 Front Communication Port ...............................................................................................8-3
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup..........................................................................................................8-4
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ............................................................................... 8-5

8.2.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................8-5
8.2.2 Measurements..................................................................................................................8-8
8.2.3 Status...............................................................................................................................8-8
8.2.4 Records .........................................................................................................................8-10
8.2.5 Settings..........................................................................................................................8-10
8.2.6 Print ............................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.7 Local Cmd......................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.8 Information .....................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.9 Test ................................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.10 Clock............................................................................................................................8-15
8.2.11 Language .....................................................................................................................8-15
8.3 Understand LCD Display.........................................................................................8-16

8.3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................8-16
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation....................................................................................8-16
8.3.3 Display When Tripping ...................................................................................................8-17
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................8-20
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes ...................................................................8-21

Date: 2015-06-29
8.3.6 Display Device Logs.......................................................................................................8-24
8.4 Keypad Operation .....................................................................................................8-26

8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values .........................................................................................8-26
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ..........................................................................................8-26
8.4.3 View Device Records .....................................................................................................8-26
8.4.4 View Device Setting .......................................................................................................8-27
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ....................................................................................................8-28
8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting..................................................................................................8-30
8.4.7 Print Device Records .....................................................................................................8-31
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group .....................................................................................................8-32
8.4.9 Delete Records ..............................................................................................................8-33
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock.....................................................................................................8-34
8.4.11 View Module Information ..............................................................................................8-35
8.4.12 Check Software Version ...............................................................................................8-35
8.4.13 Communication Test .....................................................................................................8-36
8.4.14 Select Language ..........................................................................................................8-36
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of the central unit ............................................................... 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel ................................................................. 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel ................................ 8-3
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M................................................. 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of the central unit ............................................................................. 8-7
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram ................................................................. 8-16
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ............................................................................. 8-17
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report................................................. 8-18
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ............................................................................ 8-21
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................ 8-22
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report.................................................................................. 8-25
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password ........................................................................ 8-29

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings ...................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings ...................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings .................................................................................. 8-31
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group ................................................................. 8-33
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report ................................................................................ 8-34
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock .............................................................................. 8-35
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ......................................................................... 8-37
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable .............................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.2-1 Optical fibre communication statistic information .......................................... 8-14
Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list ..................................................................................... 8-18
Table 8.3-2 Binary input list.................................................................................................. 8-22
Table 8.3-3 User operating event list ................................................................................... 8-25

Date: 2015-06-29
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview
The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module

which includes the following components:
 A 320×240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault
diagnostics and setting, etc (only available for the central unit).
 LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.
 A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.
1 11
5
HEALTHY
2 12
PCS-915
MISC ALM
3 13 BUSBAR RELAY
4 14
P
5 15
GR
6 16
ENT
7 17
C
ES
8 18
9 19
10 20
1 3 4
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of the central unit
Indication No. Description
1 A 320×240 dots liquid crystal display (only available for the central unit)
2 20 LED indicators
3 A 9-key ke ypad
4 A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 Logo, device type and name
8.1.1 Functionality
 The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an
incident occurred.
 Operator is free to browse the data.
 Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys
The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view
data or change the device’s setting.

Date: 2015-06-29
The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Figure 8.1-2 shows the keypad and keys.
P
+
GR
ENT
ESC
-
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel
No. Symbol Description
1 , , and , arrow buttons Mo ve between selectable branches of the menu tree.
2 “+”, “-“ Change parameters or setting values.
3 ENT Provide Enter/Execute function.
4 GRP Setting Group selection.
5 ESC Exit the present level in the menu tree.
NOTICE!
Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing “+”, “”, “”, “-“, “ENT” in
sequence.
Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “ -“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.
8.1.3 LED Indications
20 LED indicators are available the central unit and each bay unit. for the central unit, the 20 LED
indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (MISC ALM), others are
configurable, please refer to Chapter 9 “Configurable Function” for details. For each bay unit, only
the first three LED indicators are useful, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY),
self-supervision (MISC ALM) and tripping (TRIP).
A brief explanation about some common LED indicators has been listed as bellow.
LED Displa y Description
When the device is out of service or any hardware error is de tected

Off
HEALTHY during self-check.
Green Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.
Off When device in normal operating condition.

MISC ALM
Yellow Lit when other abnormality occurs.
Off When the device is in normal operating condition.

CH ALM
Yellow Lit when channel abnormality occurs.
CT/VT ALM Off When the device is in normal operating condition.

Date: 2015-06-29
LED Displa y Description
Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.

DS ALM
Yellow Lit when disconnector position is abnormal

BBP TRIP
Red Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.

BFP TRIP
Red Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.

MISC TRIP Lit when misc operation signal (Op_MISC) is issued. Please refer to
Red
Section 8.3.3.
 The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the
relay.
 “xx ALM” LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs
and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm. CT
circuit failure alarm can be reset when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted
or energize the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or press “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously
 The “xx TRIP” LED is turned on and latched once any protection element operates. The
“xx TRIP” LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].
8.1.4 Front Communication Port
There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
P2
P1
P3
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.

Date: 2015-06-29
P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal Device side Computer side

Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange & white TX+ of the Ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange TX- of the Ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the Ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the Ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white P1-7
The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P3-5
8 Brown P1-8
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup
MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, takes NR1102M
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled. If using
other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be set as “1”.

Date: 2015-06-29
NR1102M
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
ETHERNET
Network C
Network D
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
RTS
TXD
SGND
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree
8.2.1 Overview
Pressing “▲” at any running interface can return to the main menu. Select different submenu by
“▲” and “▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the
previous menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For fast return to the command
menu, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Up to five
latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. by “first in first out” principle. It is
arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press “▲” to enter the main menu, the interface is shown in the following diagram:

Date: 2015-06-29
Quick Menu
Language
Main Menu
If the protective device is powered for the first time, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲”
to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Language
Clock
Test
Information
Local Cmd
Print
Settings
Records
Status
Measurements

Date: 2015-06-29
Main Menu
Measurements Settings Local Cmd
Measurements1 System Settings Reset Target

Prot Settings Trig Oscillograph
Measured Values
Download
Phase Angle BBP Settings
Clear Counter
Cal Values 50DZ Settings
Confirm Disconnector
BC BFP Settings
Measurements2 Fdr BFP Settings
Measured Values SOTF Settings
Information
Phase Angle OC Settings
Cal Values PD Settings Version Info
Copy Settings Board Info
Logic Links
Status
Test
Function Links
Inputs Device Test
Device Setup
Prot Inputs Disturb Events
Device Settings
Bay Inputs Comm Settings All Test
Function Inputs Label Settings Select Test
FD Inputs Superv Events

Print
All Test
Bay Inputs
Device Info Select Test
Function Inputs
Settings IO Events
System Settings All Test
Contact Inputs
Prot Settings Select Test
Superv State BBP Settings
Internal Signal
Prot Superv 50DZ Settings
BC BFP Settings Zone Cal BI
Prot Bay Superv Fdr BFP Settings
Prot Misc Superv Disturb Items
SOTF Settings
FO Counter
FD Superv OC Settings
PD Settings
FD Bay Superv All Settings
FD Misc Superv
Logic Links
Logic Links State
Function Links Clock
Function Links All Settings
Device Setup Language
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
All Settings
All Settings
Latest Chgd Settings
Records
Disturb Records
Disturb Records
Superv Events
Superv Events
IO Events
IO Events
Device Status
Device Logs
Waveforms
Clear Records
Diff Wave
Bay Wave 1
Bay Wave 2
Bay Wave 3
Bay Wave 4
Bay Wave 5
Bay Wave 6
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of the central unit

Date: 2015-06-29
Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.
This is the maximized menu, for a specific project, if some function is not available, the
corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Measurements
This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled value s of the protective
device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device .
This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of
sampled values.
No. Item Description
1 Measurements1 Display sampled values on protection DSP module.
2 Measurements2 Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.2.1 Measurements1
The submenu “Measurements1” has following submenus.
1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on protection DSP module.
2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on protection DSP module.
3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.
8.2.2.2 Measurements2
The submenu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus.
1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module.
2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.
3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.3 Status
This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device.
These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu
comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 8.3.5 about the details of binary inputs and
Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.
1 Inputs Display the status of binary inputs
2 Superv State Display the status of alarm signals
3 Logic Links State Display the status of logic links

Date: 2015-06-29
8.2.3.1 Inputs
The submenu “Inputs” has following submenus.
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP
1 Prot Inputs
module
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector
2 FD Inputs
DSP module
Display the status of other binary inputs (such as time synchronizing binary
3 Contact Inputs input, printing binary input, maintenance binary input, resetting binary input
and opto binary inputs ).
(1) The submenu “Prot Inputs” includes the following command menus.
1 Bay Inputs Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on protection DSP module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP

2 Function Input
module.
(2) The submenu “FD Inputs” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on fault detector DSP
1 Bay Inputs
module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP
2 Function Input
module.
8.2.3.2 Superv State
The submenu “Superv State” has following submenus.
1 Prot Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module
2 FD Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module
The submenu “Prot Superv” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on protection

1 Prot Bay Superv
DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on protection DSP

2 Prot Misc Superv
module.
The submenu “FD Superv” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2015-06-29
Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on fault detector
1 FD Bay Superv
DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP

2 FD Misc Superv
module.
8.2.3.3 Logic Links State
The submenu “Logic Links State” has following submenus.
1 Function Links Display the status of function links.
8.2.4 Records
This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report
and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report
in non-volatile memory.
1 Disturb Records View the tripping report
2 Superv Events View the self-supervision report
3 IO Events View the binary input change report
4 Device Logs View the control report
5 Clear Records Clear all the device records
8.2.5 Settings
This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings,
communication parameters, label settings, function links, system settings and protection settings.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 System Settings Set the system settings
2 Prot Settings Set the protection settings
3 Logic Links Set the function links
4 Device Setup Set the settings related to device setup
8.2.5.1 Device Setup
The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2015-06-29
1 Device Settings Set the device settings
2 Comm Settings Set the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Set the label settings of each protected element.
8.2.5.2 Logic Links
The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
1 Function Links Set the function links.
8.2.5.3 Prot Settings
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 BBP Settings Set the settings about busbar differential protection
2 50DZ Settings Set the settings about dead zone fault protection
3 BC BFP Settings Set the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
4 Fdr BFP Settings Set the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
5 SOTF Settings Set the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
6 OC Settings Set the settings about overcurrent protection
7 PD Settings Set the settings about pole disagreement protection
8 Copy Settings To copy protection settings from one group to another group
8.2.6 Print
This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and
the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
1 Device Info Print the description information of protective device.
Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label

settings, function links, system settings, and protection settings. It can print
2 Settings
by different classifications as well as printing all settings of the device.
Besides, it can also print out the latest changed setting item.
3 Disturb Records Print trip reports .
4 Superv Events Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.
5 IO Events Print status change of binary signal.
6 Device Status Print all the values measured by the device
7 Waveforms Print recorded waveforms.

Date: 2015-06-29
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information

8 IEC103 Info serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and
channel number (ACC).
9 Cancel Print Cancel the print command
8.2.6.1 Settings
The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 System Settings Print the system settings.
2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings
3 Logic Links Print the function links
4 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup
Print the content of all settings including device setups, system settings,
5 All Settings
protection settings and logic links.
6 Latest Chgd Settings Print the content of the latest changed setting
(1) The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Print the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Print the label settings of protective device.
4 All Settings Print all the settings related to device setup
(2) The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
1 Function Links Print the function links.
2 All Settings Print the all the logic links
(3) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
3 BBP Settings Print the settings about busbar differential protection
4 BC BFP Settings Print the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
5 Fdr BFP Settings Print the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
6 SOTF Settings Print the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
7 OC Settings Print the settings about overcurrent protection
8 PD Settings Print the settings about pole disagreement protection
9 All Settings Print the all the protection settings

Date: 2015-06-29
8.2.6.2 Waveforms
The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus.
1 Diff Wave To print differential current waveforms and busbar voltage waveforms
2 Bay Wa ve 1 To print current waveforms of Bay 01~04
8.2.7 Local Cmd

This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD
display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal
condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send
out the request of program download and clear the communication statistic information about
optical fibre.
This menu includes the following command menus.
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording.
3 Download Send out the download request.
4 Clear Counter Clear the communication statistic information about optical fibre
5 Confirm Disconnector Confirm the disconnector position
8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software
information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module.
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
8.2.9 Test
This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device.

Date: 2015-06-29
It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication
test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without
any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,

1 Device Test including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize
the transmission of messages of different classification.
Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and
2 Internal Signal
relevant information about each protected bay
3 Disturb Items Check the fault report one by one.
Display the statistic information of abnormality of optical fibre

4 FO Counter
communication
Following table lists all the statistic information of abnormality of optical fibre communication
Table 8.2-1 Optical fibre communication statistic information
1 BUj.Alm_CRC CRC check for BUj is wrong
2 BUj.Alm_LgtIntnsty Light intensity of BUj is wrong
3 BUj.Alm_TimeOut_Comm The central unit can not receive any data from BUj
4 BUj.Alm_Chksum Checksum of the message received from BUj is wrong
5 BUj.Alm_TimeOut_Recv BUj can not receive any data from the central unit
8.2.9.1 Device Test
The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus.
View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging
1 Disturb Events
persons)
View the relevant information about alarm report (only used fo r debugging
2 Superv Events
persons)
View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used
3 IO Events
for debugging persons)
The submenu “Disturb Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements
2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu “Superv Events” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2015-06-29
1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
The submenu “IO Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
8.2.9.2 Internal Signal
The submenu “Internal Signal” has following submenus.
1 Zone Cal BI Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit
The submenu “Zone Cal BI” will display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential
circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the value of the
calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit is “1”, it means that the current of bay n
is included in differential current.
1 @Bayn.VBI_CZ Calculated binary input of bay n for check zone differential circuit
Calculated binary input of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit

2 @Bayn.VBI_DZ_@BBx
of BBx
Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for check zone differential circuit
3 @Bayn.VBI_CT1_CZ
(only for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for check zone differential circuit
4 @Bayn.VBI_CT2_CZ
(only for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT1 of ba y n for discriminating zone

5 @Bayn.VBI_CT1_DZ_@BBx
differential circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT2 of ba y n for discriminating zone

6 @Bayn.VBI_CT2_DZ_@BBx
differential circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)
8.2.10 Clock
The time of internal clock can be viewed in “Clock” option. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.

Date: 2015-06-29
8.3 Understand LCD Display
8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal
condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports.
Tripping reports and alarm reports will be continuously displayed until operators energizing the
resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg]. User can press “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously to switch
view of trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed
before returning to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and
can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation
After the protection device is powered and enters initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization, the “ HEALTHY” indicator of
the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the interface similar as Figure 8.3-1. For different
busbar arrangements, the displayed interfaces are different. The LCD displays in white color
backlight which is activated if there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished automatically
after 60 seconds without any operation.
Data and time of equipment clock
Communication address Addr:098 2010-09-28 10:10:00 Group:01 Active group number
Label of BB No.1
Fdr01 Fdr03 Fdr05 Fdr07 Label of each feeder
Label of BC BC
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.00A Phase-A current of each feeder
Phase-A current of BC 0.01A
Disconnector (Closed)
BB1
Bus Coupler
means BC is open BB2
Disconnector (Open)
means BC is closed
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.01A
Fdr02 Fdr04 Fdr06 Fdr08
Label of BB No.2
Three-phase voltage of BB No.1 U1: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V
Three-phase voltage of BB No.2 U2: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V
Three-phase differential current DI: 0.00A 0.00A 0.01A
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram
The middle part of Figure 8.3-1 displays the single line diagram of busbar with feeders whose CT
correction coefficient is not zero. The label of each feeder (at most 6 digits or characters, please
refer to label settings in Section 7.3) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding
feeder. System frequency (Freq), three-phase busbar voltages (Ux), check zone differential
current (DI), discriminating zone differential current of BBx (DIx) may be shown under the single
line diagram (x=1, 2, 3 or 4).

Date: 2015-06-29
If the protective device receives the IRIG-B signal for time synchronization and can correctly
decode it, “S” will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD.
If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and
circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key “◄”
continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key “►” continuously.
The displayed content contains: the realtime date and time of the protection device (with a format
of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), realtime valid setting group number, three-phase current and voltage
sampling values on each side and differential current etc.
8.3.3 Display When Tripping
This protection device can store 32 fault reports and 32 fault waveforms. When there is protection
element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report. The central unit can
provide two different LCD display interfaces based on the availability of self-check report.
As shown in Figure 8.3-2, if the self-check report is not provided, the display interface will only
show the fault report.
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip
0000ms Pkp_FD
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06
Fdr08
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max 1.05A
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip: shows the SOE number, the time when fault detector
picks up (the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and the title of the
report.
0000ms Pkp_FD shows the fault detector of protection element and the
operation time of fault detector is fixed at 0ms.

Fdr08 shows the relative operation time of protection element,

Date: 2015-06-29
protection elements and trip elements.

0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC shows the relative operation time and operation element
of protection element
Id_max 1.05A shows the maximum differential current
If the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8.3-2,
the upper half part on the screen is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. The
fault report includes fault report number, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format
of year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, the relative time will be displayed on the basis of fault detector
element and fault phase. If the upper half part on the screen is not big enough to list all the
protection elements and tripping elements, the report will be automatically displayed in a cycle
without pressing any key on the front panel.
The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than
one, all the alarm elements will be displayed in a cycle.
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip
0000ms Pkp_FD
Fdr08
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max 1.05A
Superv Events
Alm_Maintenance
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report
All the trip information are listed in the following tables:
1. Operation elements
Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list
1 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased Stage 1 of backup protection operates .
2 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased Stage 2 of backup protection operates .
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

Date: 2015-06-29
5 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates .
6 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates .
7 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates .
8 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates .
9 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates .
10 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates.
11 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
12 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
13 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
14 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
15 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
16 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
17 87B.Op_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.
18 87B.Op_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.

19 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
protection operates to trip BBx.

20 87B.Op
protection operates to trip any busbar.
Busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS

21 87B.Op_Trp@Bayn
bay).
Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC

22 87B.Op_A_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC

23 87B.Op_B_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC

24 87B.Op_C_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
25 @Bayn.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of bay n operates.
Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n

26 @Bayn.Op_TT
operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker.
27 @Bayn.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of bay n operates (only for BC or BS bay).
28 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates.
29 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates.
30 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates.
31 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx Breaker failure protection operates to trip BBx.
Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip busbar zone (includes

32 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BC/BS bay and feeder bay).
33 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip BC/BS.

Date: 2015-06-29
34 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker.
Breaker failure protection operates to trip breaker of bay n (only for BC

35 50BF.Op_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
BC/BS breaker failure protection or feeder breaker failure protection

36 50BF.Op
operates.
Misc operation signal, it can be used to trigger LED indicator (MISC

TRIP). The signal will be issued if any of following operation signals is
issued: 87B.Op_Trp@BCy, 87B.Op_Trp@BSz, @Bayn.Op_TT,
@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp, @BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp,
37 Op_Misc
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp, @Ba yn.50/51G.Op_Trp, @Ba yn.62PD.Op_Trp,
@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB, @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC, @Bayn.50DZ.Op, 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp, 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz.
38 Op_Prot An y of protecti ve element operates.
39 Op_Prot_Latched An y of protecti ve element operates (latched signal).
40 FD.Pkp Fault detector picks up.
41 TrigDFR_Man Waveform recording function is triggered manually.
42 TrigDFR_Rmt Waveform recording function is triggered remotely.
43 BI_TrigDFR Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input.
Sampled values of Bx (GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

44 Bx.TrigDFR_DataErr_SV
errors to trigger waveform recording function
2. Trip elements
1 @Bayn Trip circuit breaker of bay n
Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n operates to

2 @Bayn.Op_TT
initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition

This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displa yed
immediately.

Date: 2015-06-29
Superv Events NO.26

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
Alm_Maintenance 0 1
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report
Superv Events shows the title of the report
Alm_Maintenance shows the content of abnormality alarm
If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu “Superv Events” under the menu of
“Records”, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be indicated in the alarm report.
All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes
If the status of any binary changes or any logic link is modified, as shown in Figure 8.3-5, a new
report on the state changes will be automatically displayed on LCD. PCS-915 can store 1024
binary input change reports. During the running of the device, the signals will be displayed at the
moment when the its state changes.

Date: 2015-06-29
IO Events NO.26
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
87B.BI_En 0 1
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report
IO Events NO.26 shows the number and the title of the report
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500 shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
87B.BI_En 0->1 shows the state change of binary input, including the binary input
name and the original state and final state
All the binary inputs are listed in the following tables:
Table 8.3-2 Binary input list
1 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse
2 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and substation

3 BI_Maintenance
automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU).
4 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
5 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking busbar differential protection
7 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
9 @Bayn.BI_ A_BFI Phase-A breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
10 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
11 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
12 @Bayn.BI_ChkBFI Common breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

Date: 2015-06-29
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure

13 @Bayn.50BF.BI_RlsVCE
protection of bay n
18 @Bayn.BI_ A_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
19 @Bayn.BI_B_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
20 @Bayn.BI_C_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
21 @Bayn.BI_ A_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
22 @Bayn.BI_B_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
23 @Bayn.BI_C_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
24 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input
25 BI_TrigDFR Trigger waveform recording binary input
26 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling busbar differential protection
27 87B.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling busbar differential protection
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
28 BI_En_IntLinkx
operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is “0”
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured
29 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is
set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input
30 @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
and function link of a protecti ve element is configured according to each
bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
31 Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
32 50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable”
(refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
33 @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
34 @BSz.50SOTF.BI_En information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable”

Date: 2015-06-29
35 50SOTF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
36 50/51.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable”
Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

37 @Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

38 @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En
39 50/51.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection
Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection (it is configured

40 62PD.BI_En
function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is
set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection of bay n (it is

41 @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
42 62PD.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling pole disagreement protection
43 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder breaker failure protection
44 50BF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder breaker failure protection
Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder

45 BI_En_BC_Byp
breakers
Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to

46 BI_En_RevCT_Byp
substitute one of feeder breakers
8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports).
During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation
is conducted.

Date: 2015-06-29
Device Logs NO.4

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms
Settings_Chgd
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the report
2010-04-29 10:18:47:569 shows the date and the time when the report is created, the format
is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Settings_Chgd shows the state content of the user operation report.
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.3-3 User operating event list
No. Message Description
1 Reboot The protective device has been reboot.
2 Reset_Target The protective device has been reset.
3 Settings_Chgd The settings of protective device have been changed.
4 Acti veGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
5 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)
6 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
7 Process_Exit A subprocess has exited.
8 Fail_Setting_OvRange An y setting value is out of setting scope.
9 Alm_CommTest The relay is in test mode.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the designing

10 Fail_BoardConfig
drawing of an applied-specific project.
11 FD.Pkp Fault detector picks up.
12 TrigDFR_Man Waveform recording function is triggered manually.
13 TrigDFR_BI Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input

Date: 2015-06-29
No. Message Description
14 TrigDFR_Rmt Waveform recording function is triggered remotely
8.4 Keypad Operation
8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then
press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).
8.4.3 View Device Records
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the

Date: 2015-06-29
key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.
5. Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.
7. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).
For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu “ Disturb Items”, and
the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault report can
save up to 1024 events.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “ Distur b Items ”,
and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.
5. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Test” menu).
8.4.4 View Device Setting
Follow the steps below to view the device settings:
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
“ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
NOTICE!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side
of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu
and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

Date: 2015-06-29
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).
8. Select the command menu “Device Settings”, “Label Settings”, or “Comm

Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Device Setup” firstly. Select the
command menu “BBP Settings”, “50DZ Settings”, “BC BFP Settings”, “Fdr BFP
Settings”, “SOTF Settings”, “OC Settings” or “PD Settings”, users need to enter the
submenu “Prot Settings” firstly. Select the command menu “Function Links”, users
need to enter the submenu “Logic Links” firstly.
Following takes modification of system settings as an example.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “System
Settings”, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ ENT”.
5. Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press
the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to
modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu “System Settings”).
6. Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”.
Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the
“Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to
the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”).
7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all

Date: 2015-06-29
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
8. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.
Password:
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password
9. Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” or “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue
inputting it, then press “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is
correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”). The device setting
modification is completed.
NOTICE!
The above modification instructions are available for all setting items.
NOTICE!
After modifying the settings in menu “System Settings” or “Prot Settings”, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will
automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the
check process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such
as “BBP Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface:

Date: 2015-06-29
2. BBP Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group: 01
Selected Group: 01
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings
Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. For example, if the setting
[87B.I_Bias] need to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display the interface
shown in Figure 8.4-3. Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value and then press the “ENT” to enter.
87B.I_Bias
Current Value 5.00
Modified Value 005.00
Min Value 0.05
Max Value 20.00
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings
10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the “ENT”.
8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;

Date: 2015-06-29
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “ Protection
Settings”, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the command menu;
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”,
and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.
Copy Settings
Active Group: 01
Copy To Group: 02
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings
Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the
menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu “ Settings”. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
8.4.7 Print Device Records
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
 Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then
Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,

Date: 2015-06-29
the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ ESC”
to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
 Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “IEC103 Info”, “Device Status” or “Device Info”, press
the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, press “ENT” or “►” to enter the submenu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the printed
waveform and press “ENT” to enter. With waveform data existing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to
exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”). If there is no any waveform data,
the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”.
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group
1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “GRP”.

Date: 2015-06-29
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change To Group: 02
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re -check
the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Records
1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.

Date: 2015-06-29
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report
NOTICE!
The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation
reports (i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input
change reports. The deleted reports are IRRECOVERABLE, so the function shall be
used with great cautious.
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” to enter clock display.

Date: 2015-06-29
Clock
Year: 2010
Month: 04
Day: 28
Hour: 20
Minute: 59
Second: 14
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.
4. Press the key “＋” or “－”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the
modification and return to the main menu.
5. Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
8.4.11 View Module Information
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “ Board Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.12 Check Software Version
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

Date: 2015-06-29
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.13 Communication Test
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
3. Select the command menu “Disturb Events”, “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, users
need to enter the submenu “Device Test” firstly.
4. Select any command menu (takes “Disturb Events” as an example), press the key
“ENT”, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.
5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down,
and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in
the command menu “Disturb Items”.
6. If “All Test” is selected, press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of all
protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the
fault report.
NOTICE!
If selecting the “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, the substation automatic system can
receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report
or binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two
command menus of “Superv Events” and “IO Events” in the menu “Records”.
8.4.14 Select Language
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Language” menu, then press “ENT”
to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

Date: 2015-06-29
Please Select Language:
1 中文
2 English
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key
“ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will
return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press “ESC” to
cancel language switching and return to the main menu.
NOTICE!
The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different
from these.

Date: 2015-06-29

Date: 2015-06-29
9 Configurabl e Function
Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function ....................................................................... 9-a
9.1 General Description ................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software ............................................................... 9-1

9.3 Device Setup ................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.3.1 Device Information ...........................................................................................................9-1
9.3.2 Hardware Configuration ...................................................................................................9-2
9.3.3 MOT.................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.4 Function Configuration .....................................................................................................9-4
9.4 Program Configuration.............................................................................................. 9-5

9.4.1 LED Configuration ............................................................................................................9-5
9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO of the Central Unit .................................................................9-7
9.4.3 Configuration of BI and BO of Bay Unit ..........................................................................9-10
9.5 Setting Configuration...............................................................................................9-12

9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection .......................................................................................9-12
9.5.2 Browsing Settings ..........................................................................................................9-12
9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings................................................................................9-12
List of Figures
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information ................................................................................ 9-2
Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration........................................................................ 9-3
Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface.............................................................................. 9-4
Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface....................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group ..................................................................................... 9-12
Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command ....................................................................... 9-13
Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box ...................................................................... 9-13
Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value...................................................................................... 9-14

Date: 2015-06-29

Date: 2015-06-29
By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make function configuration, binary input and
binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and setting configuration for PCS-915ID.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software
PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one s ubstation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand. Please refer to Instruction
Manual of PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software for details and other functions.
Overall functions:
 Function configuration (off-line function)
 Programmable logic (off-line function)
 LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
 Binary input signals configuration (off-line function)
 Binary output signals configuration (off-line function)
 Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
 Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
 Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
 File downloading/uploading (on-line function)
9.3 Device Setup
Click “Device Config”→“Device Setup” node, and four labels are displayed in the edit window.
These labels are used to set device information, configure hardware module , configure the
software and hardware related function according to the selected series number of MOT and
configure ancillary protection functions respectively.
9.3.1 Device Information
Select “Device Information” page to view the basic information of the device. All these information

Date: 2015-06-29
are default settings in the selected driver package for creating the device. Part of the basic
information can be modified including “Project Name”, “User File Version” and “User Modify Time”.
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information
9.3.2 Hardware Configuration
Select page “Hardware Configuration” and configure hardware modules according to the project
requirements.
There are four columns information shown in this page, they are “Slot” (slot number), “Name” (the
selectable module name), “Current Type” (currently selected module type) and “Description”
(module description). The modules of which the currently selected module type are grey are not
configurable.
1. Slot: To simplify hardware configuration, the slot number of PCS series is defined to start with
slot 01 from left to right in rear view of device.
4U device (the central unit):
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
In the table, NR1301 located in slot P1 is power supply, NR1102 located in slot 01 is MON module,
and others are functional modules.
2. Name: The selectable module name is fixed in a program, normally, the module name implies
its function, such as BIO means the module can be configured as a binary input module or a
binary output module.
3. Current Type: Current module type is also marked on the aluminum base where the module is
fixed on. In this column, two types of modules can be observed: mandatory and optional. As

Date: 2015-06-29
shown in the figure below, cells in “Current Type” column marked in grey are mandatory
modules which are necessary for device normal operation, the module type is fixed. Other
cells marked in white are optional modules which can be configured according to the
application. It is convenient to change the type of optional modules by clicking the optional
module, and select the module type in the pull-down menu or select “none” to leave the slot
blank if not required.
4. Description: Module description includes the functions and parameters of the selected
module.
Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration
9.3.3 MOT
Choose “MOT” page to enter MOT configuration interface as shown below. According to the
selected series number of MOT, the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware
related function can be configured. For detailed MOT configuration, please refer to Section
“Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration” in Chapter 3.

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface
9.3.4 Function Configuration
Choose “Function Configuration” page to enter function configuration interface as shown below
(the content may vary subject to created projects). Click the pull-down list in “Option” column to
perform function configuration. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section
“Function Configuration” in Chapter 3.

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface
9.4 Program Configuration
9.4.1 LED Configuration
On front panel of PCS-915, two columns of indicators are normally provided. The first two
indicators indicate device running status (Healthy) and alarm status (Alarm). Remaining indicators
have their specific meanings according to device functions (please refer to cor responding project
configuration manual for details). Colors of these indicators may vary with functions of device.
The control of these indicators is configured by LED element configuration in PCS-Explorer.
Click “Program Config”→“Slot01:CPU” node, and select “LED” page to view and configure LED
element.
The following is an example of LED configuration:

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.4-1 Example of LED configuration
If the LED symbol and the connected input block are in blue, indicating that they cannot be
modified. For some fixed configuration, the necessary functions not allowed to change will be
marked in blue, even the attributes cannot be modified.
The indicators not in blue can be defined according to the application. The method is very simple:
Double click LED element to open its attributes setup window. users can see that it consists of 4
sub-pages. Switch to “Func Block Parameter” sub-page. Here, indicators LED3~20 can be set.
Each indicator has two items to be set: Parameter “ledx_latched” (x=3~20): click corresponding
entry under “Set Value” to select “yes” or “no”. If “yes” is selected, indicator attribute is “latched”,
indicating that after this indicator is lit, it will remain on even the initiation signal disappears until it
is reset. If “no” is selected, indicator attribute is “un-latched”, indicating that the indicator status will
follow the change of its initiation signal.
The other parameter is “ledx_color” (x=3~20): The color of indicator can be selected as required:
green, yellow, and red.
After completion of setup, click “OK” to close attributes setup window. The set parameters will be
displayed on the element, as shown below.

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.4-2 LED indicators configuration interface
Next, indicators initiation signals should be placed on the page and connect them to corresponding
input interfaces of LED element: select the output signal from the “Source” tab at the right side of
the window to be used as input source. Press and hold left button of mouse, and directly drag it to
the page. When this signal passes input signal connection point, a red dot will appear to prompt
connection. After placing it at a suitable position, connection line will be automatically generated to
connect this input signal.
9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO of the Central Unit
The central unit is normally configured with one BI module and one BO module.
9.4.2.1 Configuration of BI
The BI module is located in slot No.14.
Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot15:BIO_1”, one page node: “NR1506A” is
shown.

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.4-3 Module nodes and pages in program configuration
Click the page “NR1506A”; NR1506AS configuration graph is shown in an editing window.
Figure 9.4-4 Configuration graph of NR1506AS

Date: 2015-06-29
In the graph, NR1506AS plug-in module symbol and respective output signals are shown with
connection to output symbol block.
Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1506AS input pins: numbers in the
“PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1506AS module, and name or function of each pin
is described in the “BI_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their output signals to form
output symbol blocks.
[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized.
On the element symbol, two parameters columns of symbols “ ” and “ ”. The former
indicates BI delay pick up time and the latter indicates BI delay drop off time. If voltage applied
between a BI input and the common terminal exceeds the BI delay pick up time, corresponding
output signal will be energized, and if the applied voltage is disappeared for a period exceeding
the BI delay drop off time, the output signal will be reset.
Connect a signal to a pin of NR1506AS module and the status of this signal is reflected by the BI
output signal and the connected output symbol block in visualized page . Double click such output
symbol block and modify its description in a pop-up dialog box (or maintain default description;
input signal will not be affected).
Besides above method for the addition of BI signal and viewing the status, outputs of all configured
binary inputs (including elements) can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the window
(variable library). Please note the variable library has to be refreshed if there is any description
modification on output symbol block. The output symbol block of these binary inputs can be
configured as input symbol block of other elements by dragging .
9.4.2.2 Configuration of BO
The BO module of the central unit is located in slot No.15.
Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot15:BIO_2”, one page node: “NR1521B” is
shown.

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.4-5 Configuration graph of NR1521A
In the graph, NR1521B plug-in module symbol and respective input signals are shown with
connection to input symbol block.
Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1521B input pins: numbers in the
“PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1521B module, and name or function of each pin is
described in the “BO_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their input signals to form input
symbol blocks.
Inputs of all configurable binary outputs can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the
window (variable library). As shown in the figure, each input corresponds to one way output
contact of the BO module. The output contact of BO module will operate (output relay pickup or
reset) in response to the status change of corresponding input signal. The output contacts of BO
modules can be configured or modified according to the application or drag the required signals
from the variable library.
9.4.3 Configuration of BI and BO of Bay Unit
Each bay unit is normally configured with one BI module and two BO modules.
BI and BO module of each bay unit can be configured via configure the corresponding page under
corresponding extended DSP module node.
Takes BU1 as an example, assuming that bay 1 is corresponds to BU1, and BU1 is connected to
the central unit via the first pair of fiber (Fiber1) of the first extended DSP module (EXT-DSP_1).
Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot05:EXT-DSP_1” then click the page node
“Fiber1”.

Date: 2015-06-29
Figure 9.4-6 Configuration graph of “Fiber1”
Just use the methods introduced in Section 9.4.2.1 and Section 9.4.2.2 to configure the BI module
(NR1506AS) and BO module (NR1521A and NR1549A) of BU1.
Two internal binary inputs [BI_COMMON1] and [BI_COMMON2] are equipped for NR1504A type
BI module, when users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by
themselves, all the common BFI binary inputs ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]) of related bays must be
configured to [BI_COMMON1] (or [BI_COMMON2]) of the BI module, please refer to Section 6.4.3
for details.

Date: 2015-06-29
9.5 Setting Configuration
After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is h idden in device and in
setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer software.
9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection
Click “Settings” node to enter “Settings” interface. In the middle of editing window is the setting
group setup interface, where two parameters can be set: “Active Group” and “Setting Groups:
[1-30]” (shown in Figure 9.5-1), users can change the number in the two text boxes then click the
button “Set” to modify the two parameters. The text box of “Active Group” is used for users to
change the current active setting group. The text box of “Setting Groups: [1-30]” is used for users
to change the number of active setting groups, the number of sub-nodes of “Setting” node will
change with this parameter.
Several sub-nodes: “Global” and “Group x” (x: 1~n, n is the number that inputted in the text box of
“Setting Groups: [1-30]”, n should not be larger than 30). Among them, global settings (the
sub-node “Global”) are common for all setting groups. In setting groups Group 1~Group n, only
one group is the current active setting group used in device operation, and mainly includes
protection settings, the current active setting group can be switched among Group 1~Group n
when required.
Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group
9.5.2 Browsing Settings
Click “Settings”→“Global” node, five sub-nodes are unfolded (number of sub-nodes may vary with
different device models) in the edit window. These sub-nodes are used to set system settings,
logic links, device settings, communication settings and label settings.
Click “Settings”→“Group x” node, all the protective settings of corresponding group can be shown
by clicking corresponding setting menu item.
9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings
Although there are many setting group nodes, settings under these nodes ha ve the same layout in
editing page. Therefore, steps of modification of settings are basically the same. It is seen from the
graph that when any setting node is clicked and open, the editing page will display name, value,

Date: 2015-06-29
range, step, and unit of the settings in this sequence. Here, user can modify name and set value of
the settings according to actual application requirements.
Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command
The name of a setting is the name user will finally see on the device. Users can suitably modify
this name according to actual project requirements: right click on the name entry to be modified to
pop up a right-key context menu, execute command “Modify Name”; the following window will pop
up:
Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box
In the “Modify Name” dialog box, users will see two entries, “Original Name” is the default name of
this setting in the symbol library, and “Name” is the name currently used, and can be modified.
Modified setting value must not exceed its range (if there has an ordain). There are two types of

Date: 2015-06-29
set value modification operation: direct input of the value after double clicking corresponding entry
of the setting value, or selection from a pull-down menu.
User can also right click the entry of set value and select “Get Default Value” in the right-key
context menu, so as to obtain default set value of this entry from the symbol library.
During modification and editing operations of settings in the customizing editing window, modified
item will become red, till users perform saving operation.
Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
10 Communications
Table of Contents
10 Communications ........................................................................... 10-a
10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.6 General Functions ........................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-8
10.5.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11
10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13
10.5.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15
10.5.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-23

10.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-23

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions...................................................................................................... 10-23
10.6.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-23
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions........................................................................................... 10-23
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4
Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-9
Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ..................... 10-10
Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-11

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
This section introduces NR’s remote communications interfaces. The protective device is
compatible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The
protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the “Comm Settings”
column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and
[Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter
whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be “daisy chained”
together in electrical connection using a twisted pair.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slave Slave Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the
communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
NOTICE!
It is extremely IMPORTANT that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
so will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to
the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR CANNOT assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a
result of incorrect application of this voltage.
ENSURE that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Comm
Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
SCADA
Exchanger A
Exchanger B
Equipment Equipment Equipment
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu “Comm
Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use
the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each
Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in
Chapter “Settings” for further details.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
 Initialization (reset)
 Time synchronization
 Event record extraction
 General interrogation
 General commands

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
 Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized by the following information:
 Type identification (TYP)
 Function type (FUN)
 Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of
transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and the information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined
in the IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 General Functions

The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu “IEC103
Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 32 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
It can be printed by the submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. All the functions provided by this relay are based on generic functions of the
IEC60870-5-103. This relay will send all the relevant information on group caption to SAS or RTU
after establishing a successful communication link.
10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
 IEC 61850-2: Glossary
 IEC 61850-3: General requirements
 IEC 61850-4: System and project management

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models
 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
 IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Common
data classes
 IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Compatible
logical node classes and data classes
 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.5.2 Communication Profiles

PCS-915 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol
stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires IP address to establish communications. These addresses are
located in the submenu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation device such as
protection relays, meters, RTUs, instrument transformers, tap changers, or bay controllers.
Please note that gateways can be considered as clients and servers subject to the communication

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
object. When retrieving data from IEDs within the substation, the gateways are considered as
servers whereas transmitting data to control centers, the gateways are considered as clients.
3. Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented high speed communication between substation device, such as

protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED configurations and
communication systems according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has
an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The
entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The
SCD file is the combination of the following items: individual ICD files, SSD file, communication
system parameters (MMS, GOOSE control block, SV control block), as well as GOOSE/SV
connection relationship amongst IEDs.
10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS
Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTICE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is
broken.
1) Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
Client Client
Net A Net B Net A Net B
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true
Report Control Block Report Control Block

IED (Server) IED (Server)
Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
“false”.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
2) Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true

Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
Main MMS Link
Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
 Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.
 Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will
set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.
NOTICE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be
the same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is
198.120.0.0, network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is
198.120.1.2, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2,
i.e.: Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258,
Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
3) Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2 Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2
RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = false RptEna = true

TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
In mode 2, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;
In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.
10.5.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common
information about the IED logical device.
10.5.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is used to provide access to digital status points (including general I/O
inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be
configured before using. GGIO provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended for
the use of GGIO by client to access to digital status values from PCS-915 series relays. Clients
can utilize the IEC61850 buffered report from GGIO to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and
HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering
capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are
transmitted to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control
block (BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.5.4.2 Analog Values
Most of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Data of each MMXU logical node is
provided from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable
source. Data of MMXU1 is provided from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and
data of MMXU2 is provided from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All
these analog data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and
the corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:
 MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
10.5.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-915 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
 PDIF: current differential and transfer trip
 RBRF:Breaker failure
 PTOC: Time overcurrent
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PDIF1 is “PDIF1.ST.Op.general”. For PCS-915
series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for the
corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is reported
via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
10.5.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defined for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked until Loc is changed to false. In PCS-915 series relays, besides the logical nodes
described above, there are some other logical nodes in the IEDs:
 LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
 PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it is used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively, any
combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new “operate” of
PTRC.
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System” (IEC
60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and is independent of the trigger
mode.
10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.5.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
 TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
 IntgPd: Integrity period.
 BufTm: Buffer time.
10.5.5.2 File Transfer
MMS file services allows transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from a PCS-915
series relay.
10.5.5.3 Timestamps
The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.5.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
 A five or six-character name prefix.

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are in the form of xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is
configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and
7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation
project.
10.5.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE logic link
settings in device.
The PCS-915 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-915 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
10.5.6 ACSI Conformance

10.5.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-915
Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-915 relay
N: Currently not supported by PCS-915 relay
10.5.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.5.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Service Server/Publisher PCS-900 Series
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
10.5.7 Logical Nodes

10.5.7.1 Logical Nodes Table
PCS-915 relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the
actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-915
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential YES
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme －
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage －
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator －
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing －
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing －
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking －
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller －
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control －
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements YES

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement －
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface
10.6.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical)
at the rear side of this relay.
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.6.3 Transport Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions

10.6.4.1 Function Code
Function Code Function

0 (0x00) Confirm
1 (0x01) Read
2 (0x02) Write
3 (0x03) Select
4 (0x04) Operate
5 (0x05) Direct Operate
6 (0x06) Direct Operate No Acknowledgment
13 (0x0D) Cold Restart
14 (0x0E) Warm Restart
20 (0x14) Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15) Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16) Assign Class
23 (0x17) Delay Measurement
10.6.4.2 Supported Object List
The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table.

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION Master may issue Master shall parse
Outstation shall parse Outstation may issue
Group Variation Function Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description
Number Number Code (DEC) Code (HEX) Code (DEC) Code (HEX)
1
00, 01
(read)
Binary Input: (start, stop)
1 0 22
Any Variation 06
(assign
(no range, or all)
class)
00, 01
Binary Input: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
1 1
Packed format (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Binary Input: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
1 2
With flags (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
06
Binary Input Event: 1 (no range, or all)
2 0
Any Variation (read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
06 129
Binary Input Event: 1 (no range, or all) (response) 17, 28
2 1
Without time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
(limited qty) (unsol. resp)
06 129
2 2
With absolute time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
06 129
2 3
With relative time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
00, 01
Binary output: 1 (start, stop)
10 0
Any Variation (read) 06
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Binary output: 1 (start, stop)
10 0
Any Variation (read) 06
(no range, or all)
Binary output: 2 00, 01
10 1
Packed format (write) (start, stop)

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
3
(select)
4 17, 28 129 echo of
Binary Command:
(operate) (index) (response) request
Control relay output
12 1 5
block
(direct op)
(CROB)
6
17, 28
(dir. op, no
(index)
ack)
1
00, 01
(read)
Analog Input: (start, stop)
30 0 22
Any Variation 06
(assign
(no range, or all)
class)
00, 01
Analog Input: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
30 1
32-bit with flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
30 2
16-bit with flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
30 3
32-bit without flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
30 4
16-bit without flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Analog Input:
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
30 5 Single-prec flt-pt
(read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
with flag
(no range, or all)
06
Analog Input Event: 1 (no range, or all)
32 0
Any Variation (read) 07, 08
(limited qty)

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
06 129
Analog Input Event: 1 (no range, or all) (response) 17,28
32 1
32-bit without time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
06 129
Analog Input Event: 1 (no range, or all) (response) 17,28
32 2
16-bit without time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
06 129
Analog Input Event:
1 (no range, or all) (response) 17,28
32 5 Single-prec flt-pt
(read) 07, 08 130 (index)
without time
00, 01
Analog Input
1 (start, stop)
34 0 Deadband:
(read) 06
Any Variation
(no range, or all)
00, 01
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
Analog Input
(no range, or all)
34 1 Deadband:
00, 01
16-bit
2 (start, stop)
(write) 17,28
(index)
00, 01
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
Analog Input
(no range, or all)
34 2 Deadband:
00, 01
32-bit
2 (start, stop)
(write) 17, 28
(index)
00, 01
Analog Input
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
34 3 Deadband:
Single-prec flt-pt
(no range, or all)

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
00, 01
2 (start, stop)
(write) 17, 28
(index)
00, 01
Analog Output
1 (start, stop)
40 0 Status:
(read) 06
Any Variation
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Analog Output
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
40 1 Status:
32-bit with flag
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Analog Output
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
40 2 Status:
16-bit with flag
(no range, or all)
Analog Output 00, 01
Status: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
40 3
single-prec flt-pt with (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
flag (no range, or all)
3
(select)
4 17, 28 129 echo of
Analog Output:
41 1 5
32-bit
(direct op)
6
17, 28
(dir. Op, no
(index)
ack)
3
(select)
4 17,28 129 echo of
Analog Output:
41 2 5
16-bit
(direct op)
6
17, 28
(dir. Op, no
(index)
ack)

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
3
(select)
4 17,28 129 echo of
Analog Output:
41 3 5
Single-prec ft-pt
(direct op)
6
17, 28
(dir. Op, no
(index)
ack)
07
1 07 129
(limited
Time and Data: (read) (limited qty = 1) (response)
50 1 qty = 1)
Absolute time
2 07
(write) (limited qty = 1)
Time and Data:
2 07
50 3 Absolute time at last
(write) (limited qty = 1)
recorded time
129
Time and Data CTO: 07
(response)
51 1 Absolute time, (limited
130
synchronized qty = 1)
(unsol. resp)
129
Time and Data CTO: 07
(response)
51 2 Absolute time, (limited
130
unsynchronized qty = 1)
(unsol. resp)
1
(read)
Class Objects: 06
60 1 22
Class 0 data (no range, or all)
(assign
class)
06
Class Objects: 1 (no range, or all)
60 2
Class 1 data (read) 07, 08
(limited qty)

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
20
(enable
unsol.)
21
06
(disable
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
06
1 (no range, or all)
(read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
20
(enable
Class Objects:
60 3 unsol.)
Class 2 data
21
06
(disable
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
06
1 (no range, or all)
(read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
20
(enable
Class Objects :
60 4 unsol.)
Class 3 data
21
06
(disable
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
10.6.4.3 Communication Table Configuration
This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user-defined communication tables,
and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by
the user.
The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog
Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.
10.6.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration
To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured
independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”,
“Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.
The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
“factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the
“deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by
reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.
10.6.4.5 Binary Output Configuration
The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the “Binary Output” group. The supported control functions are listed as below.
Information Point Pulse On/Null Pulse On/Close Pulse On/Trip Latch On/Null Latch Off/Null
Remote Control Not supported Close Trip Close Trip
Logic Link Not supported Set Clear Set Clear
Extended Output See following description
To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command

point will output a high-level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On-time” in the related
“Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On-time” is set as “0”, the default
pulse width is 500ms.
10.6.4.6 Unsolicited Messages
This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as “0”. If the
unsolicited messages are transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as “1” firstly and then
the DNP3.0 master will transmit “Enable Unsolicited” command to this relay through “Function
Code 20” (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the “Binary Input” state changes or the difference
value of the “Analog Input” is greater than the “deadband” value, this device will transmit
unsolicited messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it
should forbid this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages through “Function Code 21” (Disable
Unsolicited Messages).

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications
10.6.4.7 Class Configuration
If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog
Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input”
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign
Class).

Date: 2015-06-29
10 Communications

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11 Installation ...................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 Check the Shipment ..................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-4
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-4
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-5
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-6
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ..............................................................................11-6
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-7
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...............................................................................................11-7
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of the central unit ......................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of bay unit...................................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-4
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device ......................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-7
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-8

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the device. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the device and terminated correctly and
pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in this
section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the device.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
WARNING!
ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this
end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
NOTICE!
Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic
equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in
the unit's housing.
NOTICE!
Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment.

Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's
housing.
NOTICE!
A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the chapter 6. Components
can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this device installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on the board which has been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed
for electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Check the Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.
11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this device is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

NOTICE!
Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device.
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time, extreme changes of temperature, high
levels of humidity, severe vibration and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
11.6 Mechanical Installation

NOTICE!
It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle for
heat emission of this device.
The central unit is made of a single-layer 4U height 19" chassis with 8 connectors on its rear panel.
Following figure shows the dimensions of 4U relay for reference in mounting (unit: mm).
F r on t Si d e
C u t -O u t
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of the central unit
Bay unit is made of a single layer 4U height 9.5" chassis with 8 connectors on its rear panel.
Following figure shows the dimensions of this relay for reference in mounting (unit: mm).

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
Front Side
Cut-Out
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of bay unit
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
NOTICE!

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTICE!
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTICE!
For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a
grounding strip (braided copper).

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this device, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this device. Therefore, the ground terminal on the
rear panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring
There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this device: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
 AC voltage input: stranded conductor, 1.5mm 2
 AC current input: stranded conductor, 2.5mm 2
 Power supply, binary input & output: stranded conductor, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm2
 Earthing connection: braided copper cable, 2.5mm 2 ~ 6.0mm 2
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded cable
 Electrical Ethernet communication: 4-pair twisted shielded cable (category 5E)
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

Date: 2015-06-29
11 Installation
01 02
03 04
Tighten 05 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
01
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12 Commissioning ............................................................................... 12-a
12.1 General ......................................................................................................................12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................12-1

12.3 Commission Tools..................................................................................................12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization...........................................................................................12-2
12.5 Product Checks.......................................................................................................12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized........................................................................................12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized .............................................................................................12-5
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks..........................................................................................12-7
12.5.4 Print Fault Report .......................................................................................................12-33
12.5.5 On-load Checks .........................................................................................................12-33
12.5.6 Final Checks ..............................................................................................................12-33

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
12.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current

leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
 The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
12.3 Commission Tools
Minimum equipment required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0 ~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
NOTICE!
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
 PCS-915 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization
When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
familiar with its operation.
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is f irst
put into service.
 Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test
 AC input circuits test
 Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software -based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Metering and recording test
 Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On load test.
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
 Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
 Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
 Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
 Equipment plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
 Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
 Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
 Voltage transformer circuits
 Current transformer circuits
 DC power supply

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
 Optic-isolated control inputs
 Output contacts
 Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING!
Energize this device ONLY if the power supply is within the specified operating range in
the Chapter “Technical Data”.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized
The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip when the relay was last
energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the
auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that LED because it is known to be operational.
12.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “MISC ALM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “MISC ALM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED
The “xx TRIP” LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However
the “xx TRIP” LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of the “ TRIP”
LED is required at this stage.
12.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in th e relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.7 Testing the AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.8 Testing the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning cor rectly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks

All the following protection function tests in this section is conducted based on the default pin
definition introduced in Section 6.6. For a specific project, the actual pin definition maybe different,
please connect the corresponding analog quantity, binary input and binary output signal according
to the actual pin definition.
Takes BU1, BU2 and BU32 (BC bay unit) as an example to introduce the protection function
testing, in order to convenient to test, the power supply of opto-coupler of the central unit and
related bay units should be connected as follows.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
1401 Opto+
CU
1422 COM-
+ 0501 Opto+
BU1
DC
- 0522 COM-
0501 Opto+
BU2
0522 COM-
0501 Opto+
BU32
0522 COM-
12.5.3.1 Function Configurations and Related Settings
MOT Configuration
Application F
A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers
B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT) BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)
I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other arrangement, further modifications for
the program are required
Software Version B
A: Standard 1 Please refer to Tab le 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2 contents
Language C
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol B
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE)
B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Number of Terminals A
A: 1~16 (use 8U device)
B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device) A 4U extended chassis is added

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI) C

X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
Voltage Concerned Functions A
A: With voltage concerned functions
B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode C
A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 The MON plug in module is NR1101F
(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + The MON plug in module is NR1102M
RS-232 (Printer) module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX The MON plug in module is NR1102N
(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
AC Input
A: CT 1A
B: CT 5A
Power Supply for Device
A: 110~250Vdc
Basic information configuration
All protective function Disable
Phase-segregated breaker position Disable
Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP Enable
Enforced disconnector position Disable
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
Disable
configured according to each bay
Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each
Enable
bay
Protective function configuration
Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
Enable
failure protection
IDMT o vercurrent characteristic Disable
Label settings
Name_Bus1 BB1
Name_Bus2 BB2
Name_Bay01 Fdr01
Name_Bay02 Fdr02
Name_Bay32 BC1
System settings
U2n_PP 110V
Bay1.I1n 1200A

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
Bay2.I1n 1200A
Bay3.I1n 1200A
I2n_Ref 1A
12.5.3.2 Busbar Differential Protection
All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference)
BBP Settings
87B.I_Pkp 1.8A
87B.SlopeH_CZ 0.5
87B.SlopeL_CZ 0.3
87B.SlopeH_DZ 0.6
87B.SlopeL_DZ 0.5
87B.VCE.U_Set 30V
87B.VCE.3U0_Set 8V
87B.VCE.U2_Set 3V
87B.En 1
87B.VCE.En 1
Function Links
87B.Link 1
Link_IntLink1 0
Change the following settings to avoid effects on steady state differential protection element.
[I_AlmH_CTS]=5A
[I_AlmL_CTS]=5A
All relevant binary inputs can be connected as follows.
1408 [87B.BI_En]
CU
1413 [BI_En_IntLink1]
1401 Opto+
0502 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
BU1
Test source
0501 Opto+
0502 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1]
BU2
0504 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0501 Opto+
Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En]

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
Please pay attention that the polarity mark of CT of bus coupler is the same to that of feeder
connected to bus 1, but opposite to that connected to bus 2.
 Simulate an external fault
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the reverse polarity in series and then connect CT of
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-1). Inject a current (For example
ITEST1  100 ) to make steady-state percentage restraint differential element operate.
3. VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element does not
operate.
ITEST1
A 0301
Test source 0303
0305
BU32
0302
0304
0306
0301
0303
Current Circuit
0305
BU1
0302
0304
0306
0301
0303
0305
BU2
0302
0304
0306
Figure 12.5-1 External fault test
Because check zone differential current is equal to zero, the protection judges that as an external
fault.
 Simulate an internal fault (BB1)
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 though energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 though energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
2. Connect CT of feeder 01, BC CT, and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer
to Figure 12.5-2).
3. Inject a current I TEST1  1.00 0 A to make steady-state percentage restraint differential
element operate.
4. VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element operates with
“BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED turned on simultaneously.
ITEST1
A 0301
Test source 0303
0305
BU32
0302
0304
0306
0301
0303
Current Circuit
0305
BU1
0302
0304
0306
0301
0303
0305
BU2
0302
0304
0306
Figure 12.5-2 Internal fault test (BB1)
 Inter-connected operation mode
1. Energize the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1]
2. Set the virtual binary input [Link_IntLink1]=1
3. Repeat the internal fault test mentioned above. Steady-state percentage restraint differential
element will operate to trip feeder 01 and feeder 02, “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED
will turn on simultaneously. After the test is finished, set the virtual binary input
[Link_IntLink1]=0 and de-energized the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1].
 Check the setting [87B.I_Pkp]=1.8A

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
1. Set both feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure
12.5-3)
3. Inject a current ( ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp]  0.95/2  0.85500 A), the steady state percentage
restraint differential element will not operate.
4. Inject a current (For example ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp] 1.05/2  0.94500 A), the steady-state
percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip BB1
Inject a current ( ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp]  2/2  1.80 A), the steady-state percentage restraint
0
5.
differential element will operate to trip BB1. By the timer, users can get the time of BBP
operating to trip BB1.
ITEST1
A 0301
Test Source 0303
0305
BU1
0302
0304
Current Circuit
0306
0301
0303
0305
BU2
0302
0304
0306
Start
Timer
0601 BO_Trp1_Fdr01
BU1
Stop
0602
Figure 12.5-3 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test
 Voltage control element

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
ITEST1
A 0301
0303
Current Circuit
0305
BU1
0302
0304
Test Source 0306
UTEST1 V
0301
BB1 Voltage Circuit

UTEST2 V
0303
UTEST3 V
0305
BU33
0302
0304
0306
Figure 12.5-4 Voltage controlled element test
 Check Phase Voltage
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 by energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage

(U1=U2=U3=31.5V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
3. Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence
voltage (U1=U2=U3=28.5V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.
 Check Residual Voltage
Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V,

U2=63.5V, U3=55.9V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=55.1V). Steady-state percentage differential element will
operate.
4. Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.
 Check Negative-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence rated voltage to

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.
not operate.
operate.
5. Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.
12.5.3.3 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
50DZ Settings
BC.50DZ.I_Set 0.1A
BC.50DZ.t_Op 0.15s
0516 [BC1.BI_52b]
BU32
0501 Opto+
0502 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
BU1
Test source
0501 Opto+
0502 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
BU2
0501 Opto+
 BC breaker is closed
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and
set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT the opposite polarity in series, and then connect CT of
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series. Then connect binary output contact of tripping BB2
and three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b] to test
source. Connect binary output contact of tripping BB1 and binary output contact of tripping
feeder 02 to time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-5).

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
I TEST1
A 0301
0303
BU32
0305
0302
0304
0306
0301
0303
Current Circuit
0305
BU1
0302
Test source
0304
0306
0301
0303
0305
BU2
0302
0304
0306
0601 BO_Trp1_Fdr02
BU1
0602
0601 BO_Trp1_Fdr01
BU2
Start
0602
Timer
Stop
Figure 12.5-5 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed)
3. Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to simulate to trip BC
breaker and to make dead zone fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1:
I TEST1  20 0 A and de-energize three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC
breaker; STAGE 2: I TEST1  20 A and energize three phases normally closed auxiliary
0
contacts of BC breaker)
4. Use binary output contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) as a triggering signal to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2.
5. Start test from STAGE 1. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB2. The binary output
contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) will close and control the test source to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, and then BBP will trip BB1 with a time delay for

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
dead zone fault protection operates to make BC current be exclud ed from discriminating zone
differential current. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on.
 BC breaker is open
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].
2. Energize normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b].
3. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the opposite polarity in series, and connect VTs of
BB1 and BB2. (Refer to Figure 12.5-6)
ITEST1
A 0301
0303
BU32
0305
0302
0304
Current Circuit
0306
0301
Test source
0303
0305
BU1
0302
0304
0306
V
UTEST1
0301
BB1 Voltage
0303
0305
0302
BU33
0307
BB2 Voltage
0309
0311
0308
Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open)
4. Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to make dead zone
protection operate. (For example STAGE 1: ITEST1  000 A , UTEST1  4000 V ; STAGE 2:
ITEST1  200 A , UTEST1  000 V ).
5. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB1 with
“BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
12.5.3.4 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection
50DZ Settings
Fdr.50DZ.I_Set 0.1A
Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0.02s
Bay2.50DZ.En 1
Function Links
50DZ.Link 1
1416 [Fdr.50DZ.BI_En]
CU
1401 Opto+
0516 [Fdr01.BI_52b]
Test source 0518 [Fdr01.BI_Cls]
BU1
0502 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0501 Opto+
Energize the binary input [50DZ.BI_En]
 Feeder DZP
2. Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[Fdr01.BI_52b].
3. Inject a current (0.2 IN ) to three phases of this feeder.
ITEST1
A 0301
ITEST2
Test Source A 0303
Current Circuit
ITEST3
A 0305
BU1
0302
0304
0306
4. DZP will operate and send transfer trip signal to the remote end with a time delay of 20ms.
 Manual Closing Contact

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
2. Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[Fdr01.BI_52b].
3. Energize closing binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] for 50ms and inject a current (0.2IN ) to any phase
of this feeder for 500ms. DZP will not operate.
4. If the binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] is energized for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Fdr01.Alm_Cls] will be issued and feeder DZP will still be blocked.
 Disable Feeder DZP
2. At the beginning, inject three-phase current to any feeder, which is slightly greater than 0.04 IN
(for example, 0.05 IN ) and energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker
of feeder 01 [Fdr01.BI_52b].
3. After an alarm [Fdr01.Alm_52b] is issued. When feeder current increases to over 0.2 IN ,
feeder DZP will not operate.
12.5.3.5 BC/BS SOTF Protection
SOTF Settings
50SOTF.I_Set 1A
Bay1.50SOTF.En 1
Function Links
50SOTF.Link 1
1412 [50SOTF.BI_En]
CU
1401 Opto+
Test source
0516 [BC1.BI_52b]
BU32
0501 Opto+
Check BC SOTF protection
1. Energize the binary input [50SOTF.BI_En].
2. Connect the BC CT, and connect binary input [BC1.BI_52b]. (Refer to Figure 12.5-7)

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
ITEST1
A 0301
Test source 0303
Current Circuit
BU32
0305
0302
0304
0306
Start
Timer
0601
BU32
BO_Trp1_BC1
Stop
0602
Figure 12.5-7 BC SOTF protection test
3. Injecting a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A , BC SOTF protection should not operate.
If injecting a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
If injecting a current I TEST1  20 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC

0
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of SOTF
protection operating to trip BC.
BC SOTF protection is only enabled for 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, users
must inject the current within 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, or BC SOTF
protection should not operate.
 The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
 BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04IN to being larger than 0.04IN .
 Both connected busbars are in service (when busbar phase voltage is greater than 0.3UN or
current of any connected bay is larger than 0.04IN , the busbar is thought as be in service).
12.5.3.6 Overcurrent Protection
Takes definite-time overcurrent protection of BC as an example.
OC Settings
Bay1.50/51P.I_Set 1A
Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set 1A
Bay1.50/51P.t_Op 0.5s
Bay1.50/51G.t_Op 0.5s
Bay1.50/51P.Opt_Curve 0

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
Bay1.50/51G.Opt_Curve 0
Bay1.50/51P.En 1
Bay1.50/51G.En
Function Link
50/51.Link 1
1410 [50/51.BI_En]
Test source
CU
1401 Opto+
Energize binary input [50/51.BI_En].
Connect the BC CT and binary output contact of tripping BC to time meter. (For example Figure
12.5-8)
ITEST1
A 0301
Test source 0303

Current Circuit
BU32
0305
0302
0304
0306
Start
Timer
0601
BU32
BO_Trp1_BC1
Stop
0602
Figure 12.5-8 BC OC protection test
 Check the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=4A
1. Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection will not operate.
2. Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1  20 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC
0
3.
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of phase

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set] =1A
 Check the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=4A
1. Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should not
operate.
2. Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should
operate to trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1  20 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to

0
3.
trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of
zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set] =1A
12.5.3.7 Pole Disagreement Protection
Takes pole disagreement protection of BC as an example.
PD Settings
Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set 1A
Bay1.62PD.I2_Set 0.6A
Bay1.62PD.t_Op 1s
Bay1.62PD.En 1
Function Links
62PD.Link 1
1411 [62PD.BI_En]
CU
1401 Opto+
Test source
0519 [BC1.62PD.BI_PD]
BU32
0501 Opto+
Energize the binary inputs [62PD.BI_En] and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].
 Check settings [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=5A

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
1. Connect BC CT to test source. Connect binary output contact of BC protection operating to a

time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-9).
ITEST1
A 0301
Test source 0303
Current Circuit
BU32
0305
0302
0304
0306
Start
Timer
0601
BU32
BO_Trp1_BC1
Stop
0602
Figure 12.5-9 BC pole disagreement protection test
2. Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC does not operate.
3. Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED

should be turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1  20 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
0
4.
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED

should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC.
5. After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A.
 Check the setting i.e. [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=5A
1. Connect BC CT.
Inject a current I TEST1  0.6 * 3 * 0.95  1.710 A with persisting time longer than the
0
2.
time delay [Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection does not operate.
Inject a current I TEST1  1.89 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay
0
3.
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP”

LED should be turned on.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
I TEST1  3.60 0 A
4. Inject a current and persisting time is longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP”
LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to
trip BC.
5. After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=0.6A.
6. After finishing all test of BC PD protection, de-energize the two binary inputs [62PD.BI_En]
and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].
12.5.3.8 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection
BC BFP Settings
BC.50BF.I_Set 1A
BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.5s
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF 1
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF 1
1408 [87B.BI_En]
1410 [50/51.BI_En]
1411 [62PD.BI_En] CU
1401 Opto+
0519 [BC1.62PD.BI_PD]
Test source
BU32
0514 [BC1.BI_BFI]
0501 Opto+
0502 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
BU1
0501 Opto+
0504 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
BU2
0501 Opto+
The connection is shown as follows.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
A 0301
Test source 0303
Current Circuit
BU32
0305
0302
0304
0306
Start
Timer
0601 BO_Trp1_Fdr02
BU2
Stop
0602
Figure 12.5-10 BC BFP test
 Check external binary input initiating BC BFP
1. Connect BC CT to test source.
2. STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1  0.950 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and
[BC1.BI_ChkBF I] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP will not operate.
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1  1.05 0 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and
[BC1.BI_ChkBF I] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP operates to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP TRIP” LED
and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on.
energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1  20 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE
1 to STAGE 2. BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP”
LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of BC BFP operating to trip
BB2.
 Check BBP initiating BC BFP
Change the setting [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1
Energize the function binary input [87B.BI_En]

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
2. Simulating an internal fault on BB1 (please refer to Section 12.5.3.2).
3. Inject a current ITEST1  20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC
TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate
to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[87B.BI_En].
 Check OC protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [Bay1.50/51P.En]=1, [50/51.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En]
2. Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.6).
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. OC protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP
TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[50/51.BI_En].
 Check PD protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [Bay1.62PD.En]=1, [62PD.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En]
2. Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.7).
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
4. PD protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP
TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[62PD.BI_En].
12.5.3.9 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection
Fdr BFP Settings
50BF.t_ReTrp 0.15s
50BF.t_TrpBC 0.25s
50BF.t_TrpBB 0.35s
50BF.VCE.U_Set 30V
50BF.VCE.3U0_Set 8V
50BF.VCE.U2_Set 3V
Bay2.50BF.I_Set 1.5A
Bay2.50BF.3I0_Set 1A
Bay2.50BF.I2_Set 1A
Bay2.50BF.En_3I0 0
Bay2.50BF.En_I2 0
50BF.En_Current_Ctrl 1
Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE 0
50BF.En 1
50BF.VCE.En 1
50BF.En_ReTrp 1
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF 1
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF 1
Function Links
50BF.Link 1

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
1408 [87B.BI_En]
1409 [50BF.BI_En]
1410 [50/51.BI_En]
CU
1411 [62PD.BI_En]
1401 Opto+
0519 [Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD]
Test source
0514 [Fdr01.BI_BFI]
0520 [50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
BU1
0502 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0501 Opto+
0502 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1]
BU2
0501 Opto+
Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_En]
Set feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary inputs
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].
Connect the VT of BB1 and CT of feeder 01 to test source (Refer to Figure 12.5-11).

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
V V V
UTEST1
0301
UTEST2
BB1 Voltage Circuit

0303
UTEST3 0305
BU33
0302
0304
0306
ITEST1
A 0301
0303
Current Circuit
Test source
0305
BU1
0302
0304
0306
Timer Start
t2 0601
BU32
BO_Trp1_BC1
Stop
0602
Start
t1 0601 BO_Trp1_Fdr01
BU1
Stop
0602
Start
t3 0601 BO_Trp1_Fdr02
BU2
Stop
0602
Figure 12.5-11 BFP test
 Check external binary input initiating BFP
STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE 2:

0
1.
I TEST1  1.425 0 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP will
not operate.
STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE 2:

0
2.
I TEST1  1.575 0 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP
operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “ BFP
TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” will be turned on.
ITEST1  00 0 A
3. STAGE 1: and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE 2:
I TEST1  30 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of STAGE 1

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED and
“MISC TRIP” will be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of feeder BFP operating to
re-trip feeder 01 (t1), trip BC breaker (t2) and trip BB1 (t2).
 Check BBP initiating BFP
Change the two settings [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En]
1. Simulating an internal fault on BB1.
Inject a current I TEST1  30 A and the persisting time is set as 1s.
0
2.
3. BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC
TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC
breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[87B.BI_En].
 Check OC protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [Bay2.50/51P.En]=1 and [50/51.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En]
1. Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.6).
0
2.
3. OC protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will
be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.50/51P.En]=0 and de-energize the binary
input [50/51.BI_En].
 Check PD protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [Bay2.62PD.En]=1 and [62PD.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En]
1. Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.7).
0
2.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
3. PD protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “ BFP TRIP” LED will
be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[62PD.BI_En].
 Check VCE of BFP
 Check Phase Voltage
1. Set three stages: STAGE1: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V
UTEST3  63.5120 0 V , ITEST1  00 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized;
STAGE2: U TEST1  31.50 V , U TEST2  31.5  120 V , U TEST3  31.5 120 V ,

0 0 0
I TEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized;

0 0 0
ITEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized.
2. The persisting time of STAGE 1, STAGE 2 and STAGE 3 are set as 1s.
3. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP will not operate. Sequentially test from STAGE 2 to
STAGE 3. BFP operates.
 Check Residual Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V

0 0 0
I TEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized; STAGE3:
U TEST1  63.50 0 V , U TEST2  63.5  120 0 V , U TEST3  55.1120 0 V ,

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
5. Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.
 Check Negative-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V.

0 0 0
I TEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized; STAGE3:
U TEST1  63.50 0 V , U TEST2  63.5  120 0 V , U TEST3  54.05 120 0 V ,
5. Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.
 Check external binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] releasing the VCE of BFP
Change the logic setting [Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] as “1”.
1. De-energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE].
2. Set two stages: STAGE1: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V
STAGE2: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V , UTEST3  63.5120 0 V ,
IT ESY1  2. 50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized.
3. The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
4. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate.
5. Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] and repeat the above test, BFP will operate.

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commissioning
12.5.4 Print Fault Report
In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.5 On-load Checks
The objectives of the on-load checks are:
 Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
 Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
 Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiri ng that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.5.6 Final Checks

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared

Date: 2015-06-29
12 Commi ssioning
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2015-06-29
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13 Maintenance .................................................................................... 13-a
13.1 Appearance Check .................................................................................................13-1
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair ...................................................................................13-1

13.3 Replace Failed Modules ........................................................................................13-2
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................................13-3
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................................13-3

Date: 2015-06-29
13 Maintenance

Date: 2015-06-29
13 Maintenance
This device is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal
processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays
are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is det ected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

1. The device case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly
fixed in the case. Device terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel
with very good feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw device board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the
primary system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the
device board when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “ Superv State” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
1. Test circuit connections are correct
2. Modules are securely inserted in position
3. Correct DC power voltage is applied
4. Correct AC inputs are applied
5. Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

Date: 2015-06-29
13 Maintenance
13.3 Replace Failed Modules
WARNING!
Module can ONLY be replaced while the device power supply is switched off.
ONLY appropriately trained and qualified personnel can perform the replacement by
strictly observing the precautions against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
Five seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wristband and placing modules
on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, electronic
components could be damaged.
CAUTION!
Check the device configuration after a replacement of module. Unintended operation of

device may occur.
If the failure is identified to be in the device module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the device by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, BI, BO, etc.)
and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced should
have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the
same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Information”->“Version Info”.
1) Replacing a module
 Switch off the DC power supply
 Disconnect the trip outputs
 Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
 Unscrew the module connector
 Unplug the connector from the target module.

Date: 2015-06-29
13 Maintenance
 Unscrew the module.
 Pull out the module
 Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
 After replacing the MON module, input the application-specific setting values again.
2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
 Open the device front panel
 Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
 Detach the HMI module from the device
 Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the device, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
The spare device or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to +70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C
to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

Date: 2015-06-29
13 Maintenance

Date: 2015-06-29
14 Decommi ssioning and Di sposal
14 Decommissioning and Disposal
Table of Contents
14 Decommissioning and Disposal .................................................. 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ...................................................................................................14-1
14.2 Disposal.....................................................................................................................14-1

Date: 2015-06-29

Date: 2015-06-29
14.1 Decommissioning
DANGER!
Switch OFF the circuit breaker for primary CTs and VTs BEFORE disconnecting the
cables of AI module.
WARNING!
Switch OFF the external miniature circuit breaker of device power supply BEFORE
disconnecting the power supply cable connected to the PWR module.
WARNING!
KEEP an adequate safety distance to live parts of the power substation.
1. Switching off
To switch off this device, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
3. Dismantling
The device rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
14.2 Disposal
NOTICE!
Strictly observe all local and national laws and regulations when disposing the device.

Date: 2015-06-29

Date: 2015-06-29

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 R1.00 2014-10-24 Form the original manual.
R1.00 R1.01 R1.00 2015-06-29 The MON module NR1101D is replaced by NR1101F.
The time delay setting range of dead zone fault protection is
modified;
The time delay for BC/BS CT circuit failure/abnormality alarm is
modified;
R1.01 R1.02 R1.02 2015-11-24
The system frequency is displayed as the debug value;
Jumpers configuration of clock synchronization port of MON
module is added;
DNP3.0 protocol related settings are modified.
Three communication settings [RecDur_PreTrigDFR],
[RecDur_PostFault], and [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR] are added;
The setting range of [Bayn.I1n], [Bayn.I1n_CT1] and
[Bayn.I1n_CT2] are modified as “-9999~9999”;
R1.02 R1.03 R2.00 2016-03-22
Differential current and restraint current will be displayed under
the menu of “Cal Values”;
“System phase sequence” can be configured via the
PCS-Explorer software.

Date: 2016-03-22

Date: 2016-03-22

PCS-915ID - X - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R1.03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-915ID - X - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R1.03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Distributed Busbar Relay

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay i

Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.

ii PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

P/N: ZL_PCS-915ID_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R1.03

PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

5 Measurement and Recording

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

BI Binary signal via opto-coupler

SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting

EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay v

SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

OTH Input of other signal

XXX Output signal

IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

vi PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay 1-a

1-b PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

Bay01 Bay02 Bay31

Bay Unit Bay Unit Bay Unit

PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay 1-1

PCS-915ID provides the following functions

 Busbar differential protection (87B)

 Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection

 DPFC percentage restraint differential protection

 Bus coupler protection

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

 Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)

 Overcurrent protection (50/51)

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

1-2 PCS-915ID Distributed Busbar Relay

 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

 Overcurrent protection (50/51)

DPFC is the abbreviation of “deviation of power frequency component”. When a fault

 Dynamic busbar replica

 Disconnector position alarm

1. Protection and Control

 Parallel calculation of double DSP system